Yamaha RX-V740 U Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V740 U

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V740

AV Receiver

0100RX-V740-cv1_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:15 PM1

I CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended

by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or

rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the

manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into

the product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:19 PM2

CAUTION II

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved

by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the

FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC

Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.

Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one

of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,

specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the

grounding system of the building, as close to the point of

cable entry as practical.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are

required, be sure the service technician has used

replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have

the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric

shock, or other hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or

repairs to this product, ask the service technician to

perform safety checks to determine that the product is in

proper operating condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the

antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA

70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of

the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in

wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection

to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the

grounding electrode.

0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:19 PM3

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back

of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,

which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to

this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed

to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this

unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

–

Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the

user and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.

If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power

cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power

plug from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

III CAUTION

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:19 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel................................................................. 4

Remote control .......................................................... 6

Front panel display .................................................... 8

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ........................................................... 39

Set menu list ............................................................ 39

Adjusting the items on the set menu ....................... 39

SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET

(speaker mode settings) ...................................... 40

SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) ........ 42

SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL .......................................... 42

SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ................. 42

SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ

(center graphic equalizer) .................................... 43

SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL

(headphone tone control) .................................... 43

INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .. 43

INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ........ 44

INPUT 3 INPUT RENAME .................................... 44

OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET ...................................... 44

OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ......... 45

OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE ..................................... 45

OPTION 4 ZONE SET ........................................... 45

OPTION 5 REC OUT ............................................. 45

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46

Control area ............................................................. 46

Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47

Changing the source name in the display window .. 48

Clearing renamed source names, and setup

manufacturer codes ............................................. 49

Controlling other components ................................. 50

SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS ................ 51

Adjusting the volume during playback ................... 51

Using the test tone ................................................... 51

ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models) .............................................................. 52

Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 53

PREPARATION

CONNECTIONS .................................................... 9

Before connecting components ................................. 9

Connecting video components ................................ 10

Connecting audio components ................................ 12

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 13

Connecting an external amplifier ............................ 14

Connecting an external decoder .............................. 14

Connecting the speakers .......................................... 15

Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18

Turning on the power .............................................. 18

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 19

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS ............................. 20

Using the basic menu .............................................. 20

Setting the unit to match your speaker system ........ 22

Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) ............. 22

BASIC OPERATION

PLAYBACK .......................................................... 23

Input modes and indications .................................... 25

Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

............................................................................ 29

Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29

Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29

CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30

CINEMA-DSP Programs ........................................ 30

Sound field effects ................................................... 32

TUNING ................................................................ 33

Presetting stations .................................................... 34

Selecting a preset station ......................................... 36

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 37

RECORDING ....................................................... 38

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING .......................................................... 54

What is a sound field? ............................................. 54

Sound field program parameters ............................. 54

Changing parameter settings ................................... 55

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ........... 56

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 60

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 64

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 66

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

FEATURES

Other features

◆ 96 kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ Set menu for optimizing this unit for your Audio/

Video system

◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance

adjustment

◆ 6-channel external decoder input

◆ On screen display function helpful in controlling this

unit

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Video Conversion (Composite Video ⇔ S Video)

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

◆ Custom Installation Zone 2 Facility (U.S.A., Canada

and Australia models only)

◆ Zone B capability

“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Main: 90 W + 90 W

Center: 90 W

Rear: 90 W + 90 W

Rear center: 90 W

Multi-mode digital sound field processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6

Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or

DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing)

■ About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases

when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is

given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of

the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM2

English

INTRODUCTION

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

1 Press the part marked with a and slide off

the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the four batteries supplied (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings on

the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into

place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in

the operating range of the remote control, that the

indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the

battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

AM loop antenna

(Europe, U.K., Australia and

Singapore models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea and General models)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model)

DISC SKIP

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns the unit on, or sets it in standby mode. When you

turn the unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4

to 5-second delay before it can reproduce sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, the unit uses a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 INPUT MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) received when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks. You cannot set

priority for an audio source if you have selected 6CH

INPUT as the input source.

3 INPUT

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

4 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks. This selection takes priority over sources selected

with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote

control).

5 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

6 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of the

unit.

7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the

colon (:) turns on or off).

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

9 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores the current station in memory.

q VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

MODE START

RDS MODE/FREQ

PTY SEEK

EON

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

NEXT SET MENU

1 32 4 8756 q90

epo

t iu

a s fd

MODE START

RDS MODE/FREQ

PTY SEEK

EON

w r y

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION

w SILENT (PHONES jack)

Allows you to enjoy DSP effects when listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones to the

headphone jack, no signals are output to the speakers or

the OUTPUT jacks.

e SPEAKERS A/B

Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or

B terminals on or off.

r STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When you select STEREO, the unit mixes

down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE

channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without

effects, to the main left and right speakers.

t PROGRAM l / h

Select the DSP program.

y A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset station groups A to E when the unit is in

tuner mode.

Selects the set menu mode when the unit is not in tuner

mode.

u PRESET/TUNING l / h

Select preset station numbers 1 to 8 when a colon (:) is

displayed in the front panel display.

Select the tuning frequency when a colon (:) is not

displayed when the unit is in tuner mode.

SET MENU –/+

Adjust settings on the set menu when the unit is not in

tuner mode.

i VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable

external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source

to V-AUX to select source signals from these jacks.

o BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or left to decrease the low-

frequency response.

p TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or left to decrease the high-

frequency response.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

a RDS MODE/FREQ

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS

station, to cycle the display mode among PS mode,

PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers

those RDS data service) and/or frequency display

mode in turn.

s PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK

mode.

d PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after

the desired program type has been selected in the PTY

SEEK mode.

f EON

Press this button to select a radio program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in

automatically.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM5

DISC SKIP

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

Remote control

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 STANDBY

Sets the unit in standby mode.

4 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of the unit.

5 Å/ı/Ç

Sets the remote control to operate other components (not

necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this

unit’s input source.

6 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and set the remote control to

operate the selected source component.

7 Display window

Shows the source component you are currently

controlling.

8 LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to adjust.

9 Multi control section

Used to change and implement settings.

0 TEST

Outputs a test tone for use when adjusting the speaker

levels.

q DSP program

Select DSP programs when the remote control is in AMP

mode. Press one of these buttons repeatedly to select a

DSP program within a program group.

w RE-NAME

Used to change the input source name in the display

window.

e CLEAR

Used to clear functions acquired using the rename

features, and to set manufacturer codes.

r CODE SET

Used to set up manufacturer codes (see page 47).

t SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

y 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks.

This section describes the controls and functions of the

remote control. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected

before use.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM6

English

INTRODUCTION

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

u SELECT k/n

Set the remote to control a component other than the one

selected with the input selector buttons.

i AMP

Switches the function of the same controls between AMP

and the component selected using the input selector

buttons.

o VOL +/–

Increase or decrease the volume level.

p MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

a SET MENU

Selects the set menu mode.

s ON SCREEN

Displays the input or operation status on the on-screen

display.

d STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When you select STEREO the unit mixes

down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE

channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effect

sounds, to the main left and right speakers.

f 6.1/5.1

Switches the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder on or

off.

g NIGHT

Sets the unit in night listening mode.

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

CODE SET

30° 30°

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM7

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

DISCRETEMATRIX

DIGITAL

PCM

SILENT

DSP

HiFi

NIGHT

VIRTUAL

A B

AUTO

STEREO

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

MEMORYTUNED

L C R

RLLFE RC RR

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

CTRTPTYPS

HOLDPTYEON

ZONE2

90qw yer uiop

1 Processor indicators

The indicators for the various decoders light up when the

decoders are in use.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.

3 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected to the

headphone jack.

4 Input source indicator

Highlights the current input source with a cursor.

5 Sound field indicator

Displays the sound field management the unit is using

when you listen to a DSP sound field program.

6 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

7 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

8 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

9 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

0 SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and the digital

sound field processor is on.

q SP A B indicator

Lights up to indicate which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

w NIGHT indicator

Lights up when the unit is set to night listening mode.

e HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a Hi-Fi DSP sound field

program.

r CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

t Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when you are adjusting or changing settings.

y STEREO indicator

Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal from

a FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

u TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned to a radio station.

i MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored in memory.

o SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

p LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

a Input channel indicator

The indicators for the appropriate sound channels light up

when a digital signal from a source is played back.

s ZONE2

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Lights up when Zone 2 power is on.

d RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received.

PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

Front panel display

(U.K. and Europe models only)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:28 PM8

English

PREPARATION

PHONO

MAIN

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

R L

CENTER MONITOR OUT

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

ZONE 2

OUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SIGNAL

GND

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR-1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

REAR

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND

)

MAIN

IN OUT

OUTPUT

DVD

COMPORNENT VIDEO REMOTE

CONTROL

SPEAKERS

R L

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

CAUTION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the

mains power until all connections between the

components have been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component you wish to

connect to this unit.

• After you have completed all connections, check them

again to make sure they are correct.

• The jack names correspond to the names on the input

selector.

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. Use digital connections if you wish

to enjoy the multi-channel sound track of DVD material,

etc. with DSP effects. All digital input jacks are

acceptable for 96 kHz sampling digital signals.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard this unit may not function properly.

AC OUTLETS

(page 18)

6CH INPUT jacks

(page 14)

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

(page 12)

OUTPUT jacks

(page 14)

DIGITAL INPUT jacks

(pages 9 – 12)

Antenna input terminals

(page 13)

Speaker terminals

(page 17)

Video component jacks

(pages 10 – 11)

Audio component jacks

(page 12)

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack (page 17)

This jack is reserved for factory use.

Do not connect any equipment to this jack.

ZONE 2 OUT jacks (page 52)

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models only)

REMOTE CONTROL jacks (page 52)

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM9

Connecting video components

Refer to the connection examples on the next page.

■ Types of video jacks

1 VIDEO jack

Conventional composite video signal.

2 S VIDEO jack

Transmits color and luminance separately and

achieves high-quality color reproduction.

3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit color difference (P

B, PR) and luminance

separately and provide the best quality picture.

Use the commercially available cable type specified for

connecting each jack.

• Signals received through the S VIDEO input jacks can be

converted to composite signals in this unit and output through

its VIDEO MONITOR OUT as well.

• (With the exception of China and General models) Signals

received through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output

through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting “V

CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu to

ON.

• When the unit receives signals through both S VIDEO and

VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have

priority.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks to suit your components by using “INPUT 1 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the set menu.

■ Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.

Note

• If you connect this unit with a source component using

Component video jacks, you also need to connect your video

monitor using Component video jacks.

■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable

Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on

your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and

connect the video signal output jack on the component to

the VIDEO jack on this unit.

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a video component

which does not have optical digital output jack. However,

multi-channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio

signals input from the AUDIO jacks.

■ Connecting a recording component

Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video

component to the AUDIO OUT jacks on this unit. Then

connect the video signal input jack on the video

component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for

picture recording.

Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component

to the AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Then connect the

video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO

IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording

component.

A second VCR or DVD recorder can be connected using

the VCR 2/DVR jacks.

Note

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEOVIDEO

1 2 3

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Only when “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY

SET” is set to ON on the set menu.

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Signal flow inside this unit

Input

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM10

English

PREPARATION

indicates video signal direction

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates audio signal direction

Video monitorVCR

DVD player

TV/digital TV/

cable TV

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SIGNAL

GND

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR-1

OUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

REA

CENT

REAR

(SURROUND

)

MAIN

OUTPUT

DVD

COMPORNENT VIDEO

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

INPUT

LR LR

VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

L R

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM11

PHONO

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SIGNAL

GND

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR-1

OUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

DVD

COMPORNENT V

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

GND

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

Connecting audio components

■ Connecting a CD player

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player

to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack on this unit.

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD player which does

not have coaxial digital output jack.

■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD

recorder

Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/

CD-R jack on this unit for digital recording.

Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/

CD-R jack on this unit to play a source from your

recording component.

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD recorder or MD

recorder which does not have optical digital input or output

jack.

indicates signal direction

Turntable

CD player

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks

are independent. The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack only outputs

digital signals, while the OUT (REC) jacks output analog

signals only.

■ Connecting a turntable

Connect the output jacks on your turntable to the PHONO

jacks on this unit.

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. Please note that this connection may increase noise

with some record players.

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

CD recorder or

MD recorder

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM12

English

PREPARATION

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General

models only)

Because the inter-station frequency

spacing differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on

the rear panel) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM/AM

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

Connecting the antennas

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

Unit:

mm (inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals.

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM13

Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows.

Note

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, the SPEAKERS terminals also

output signals.

1 MAIN jacks

Main channel line output jacks.

Note

• The signals output through these jacks are affected by the

BASS and TREBLE settings.

2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

3 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 REAR CENTER jack

Rear center channel line output jack.

5 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system

to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in

accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The

unit also directs the LFE (low-frequency effect) signals

generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded to this

jack based on your SPEAKER SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main

left and right speakers by changing the settings of “SOUND 1

SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level.

You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s

remote control (see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on

page 51).

Connecting an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN

left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

component equipped with a multi-channel decoder and 6

channel output jacks such as a DVD/SACD player.

Note

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, the unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot use DSP programs.

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

REAR

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND

)MAIN

OUTPUT

12 3

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

L R LR

CENTER

SUBWOOFER MAIN

SURROUND

DVD/SACD player

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM14

English

PREPARATION

■ Speaker placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main speakers

Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance between

each speaker and each side of the video monitor should

also be the same.

Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the

monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.

Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the

rear left and right speakers at the same height from the

floor as the rear speakers.

Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. However, it is

better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers.

Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce

wall reflections.

Note

• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or

rear center), change the settings of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER

SET” items at the set menu to direct signals to other terminals

you have connected speakers to.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers

still create interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

Connecting the speakers

■ Speakers

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and

right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center

speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different

brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your

system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types

of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is

for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center

speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and

provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is

ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center

speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)

Center speaker

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM15

■ Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) in accordance with the markers on

this unit, the speakers, and the speaker cables. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers,

and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit

and/or the speakers.

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

CONNECTIONS

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Unscrew the knob.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

• You can also use banana plug connectors. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may

damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the

way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in

standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system.

Switch

position

Left

Right

Speaker

Main

Center,

Rear Center,

Rear

Main*

Center,

Rear Center,

Rear

Impedance level

If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω/8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω/16 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch

(General model)

* [Canada model only]

When the switch is set to right, you cannot use “A+B”.

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM16

English

PREPARATION

PHONO

MAIN

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

R L

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SIGNAL

GND

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR-1

OUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

REAR

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND

)

MAIN

OUTPUT

DVD

COMPORNENT VIDEO

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

R L

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

4231

Subwoofer

system

Rear center

speaker

Main B speaker

Center

speaker

Right

Rear speaker

SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. This unit will direct low bass signals distributed from the

main, center and/or rear channels to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance

with your SPEAKER SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of “SOUND 1

SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu to MAIN.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control

(see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on page 51).

Right Left

Main A speaker

Right Left Left

MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

You can connect up to two speaker systems to these

terminals. When using only one speaker system, connect

it to either of the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals.

REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these

terminals.

CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

CONNECTIONS

The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening

room.

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM17

Connecting the power supply

cords

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug in this unit to a wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and

General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS

U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any source component connected to this unit

whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power

(total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the

area which it was purchasing.

China and General models......................................... 50 W

Other models ......................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/

220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

Turning on the power

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

The level of the main volume, and then the current

DSP program name appear on the front panel

display.

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

(General model)

REAR

CENTER

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

POWER

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM18

English

PREPARATION

P01 CONCERT HALL

≥

INIT.DLY…………45ms

DSP LEVEL…………0dB

ROOM SIZE…………1.0

LIVENESS…………………5

P01 CONCERT HALL

DSP LEVEL…………0dB

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

You can display operational information for this unit on a

video monitor. It is much easier to see the available

options and parameters on a monitor than by reading this

information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is playing, the OSD is superimposed over the

video image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when

there is no video signal using “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on

the set menu.

■ OSD modes

You can select the amount of information shown in the

on-screen display.

Full display

This mode shows the DSP program parameter settings

continuously on the video monitor.

Short display

This mode briefly shows the front panel display message

at the bottom of the screen and then disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows “DISPLAY OFF” at the bottom

of the screen and then disappears. In this mode, no

operational information is shown on the monitor, except

when ON SCREEN is pressed.

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME

and other operational information is displayed at the bottom of

the screen, in the same format as on the front panel display.

• The set menu and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

Full display Short display

■ Selecting the OSD mode

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP

mode.

Check that “AMP” is showing in the display on the

remote control.

3 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the

display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order:

full display, short display, and display off.

Notes

• The OSD will not display if your video monitor is only

connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit. Be

sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks and either the VIDEO or the S VIDEO jacks if

you want to see the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

(When using two video monitors)

• If you select video source from a component connected to

both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and

both the S VIDEO OUT and the composite VIDEO OUT jacks

are connected to two different monitors, the OSD is only

displayed on the monitor connected to the S-video jacks.

When there is no video signal input from source component,

the OSD appears on both monitors.

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

SELECT

–

0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:30 PM19

Using the basic menu

Use the remote control to make adjustments.

• Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select

the main speakers you want to use.

• Make sure you disconnect headphones from this unit.

1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP

mode.

Check that “AMP” is showing in the display on the

remote control.

2 Press SET MENU.

“BASIC MENU” appears on the front panel display,

as shown here.

If the front panel display

changes to show anything

other than “BASIC MENU”,

press u until it displays

“BASIC MENU”.

3 Press j / i to enter into the BASIC menu.

The front panel display changes as shown here:

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

The “BASIC” menu allows you to set some of the basic “SOUND” menu parameters with a minimum of effort. If you

wish to configure the unit more precisely to suit your listening environment, use the more detailed parameters from the

“SOUND” menu instead of those under the “BASIC” menu (See page 40). Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu

will reset all parameters in the “SOUND” menu.

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

3,5

4,7

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

4 Press u / d to change the display to the

setting you want to alter.

SETUP

Changes the speaker and amplifier settings to suit the

size of the room you are using. Refer to “Setting the

unit to match your speaker system” for more

information.

SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output levels of the speakers.

Refer to “Setting speaker output levels” for more

information.

5 Press j / i to enter the desired setting mode.

6 Change the unit settings to suit your

listening environment. When you have

finished, the unit will automatically return to

the basic menu.

7 Press u / d to exit from the set menu.

The front panel display changes in the following

order:

BASIC MENU

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

1 SETUP

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

↑

BASIC

↓↑

SOUND

↓↑

INPUT

↓↑

OPTION

↓

Exit

0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM20

English

PREPARATION

SET MENU

BASIC SOUND INPUT OPTION

1 SETUP

Press j / i to alter the settings for each

parameter. Use d to move to the next

setting.

2 SP LEVEL

Press j / i to adjust the balance

between each speaker and the left main

speaker. Use d to move to the next

setting.

1 ROOM

Choose from S/M/L.

2 SUBWOOFER

Choose either of YES/NONE.

3 SPEAKERS

Choose from 2/3/4/5/6 spk.

4 SET/CANCEL

Choose either of SET/CANCEL.

5 CHECK OK:

Choose either of YES/NO.

1 L-R

Adjust the balance between the main

left and right speakers.

2 C

Adjust the balance between the main

left and center speakers.

3 RL

Adjust the balance between the main

left and rear left speakers.

4 RC

Adjust the balance between the rear

left and rear center speakers.

5 RR

Adjust the balance between the rear

left and rear right speakers.

SET

YES

CANCEL

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

• After altering the “1 SETUP” parameters, readjust the output levels of the speakers at “2 SP LEVEL”.

• See pages 39 – 45 for a detailed explanation of the “SOUND”, “INPUT” and “OPTION” menus.

6 SWFR

Adjust the balance between the main

left speaker and the subwoofer.

0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM21

Setting the unit to match your

speaker system

Follow the instructions below to set the amplifier output

to match the size of your room and speakers. Press u / d

to cycle through parameters 1 through 4, and j / i to alter

the parameter setting.

Factory default settings are highlighted.

1 ROOM

Settings: S, M ,L

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S: 16ft. x 3ft., 200sq.ft. (4.8 x 4m, 20m

)

M: 20ft. x 16ft., 300sq.ft. (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

)

L: 26ft. x 19ft., 450sq.ft. (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m

)

[Other models]

S: 3.6m x 2.8m, 10m

M: 4.8m x 4.0m, 20m

L: 6.3m x 5.0m, 30m

2 SUBWOOFER

Settings: YES, NONE

Select YES if you have a subwoofer in your system,

or NONE if you do not.

3 SPEAKERS

Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (spk)

Select the number of speakers you wish to use in your

speaker configuration. This number does not include

your subwoofer.

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

4 SET or CANCEL

Select SET to confirm the changes you made to the

above three settings. The unit will output a test tone to

the speakers (see

). Alternatively, select CANCEL

to exit this menu without altering any of the unit

settings.

5 Use the test tone to check the speaker levels.

When you select SET in

, the display changes to

“CHECK: TestTone”, and the unit outputs a test tone

to each of the speakers in turn. When the test tone

begins, the display changes to “CHECK OK: YES”.

If the volume of the test tone varies between speakers,

press j / i to change the display to “NO”. The unit

will automatically enter the “2 SP LEVEL” mode.

If the test tone is output at the same volume from all

of the speakers, select “CHECK OK: YES”. The unit

will exit from the SETUP menu.

Notes

• The unit cycles the test tone around each of the speakers in

turn twice.

• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone

flashes on the front panel display.

Setting speaker output levels

(SP LEVEL)

Use this menu to compare and adjust the test tone output

from each speaker to the output from the left main (or left

rear) speaker so that the volume level for all speakers is

identical. Press u / d to select a speaker, then adjust the

balance using j / i .

Note

• The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker and

the left main (or left rear) speaker in turn. The indicator of the

speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front

panel display.

1 L-R

Adjusts the balance between the main left and right

speakers.

2 C

Adjusts the balance between the main left and center

speakers.

3 RL

Adjusts the balance between the main left and rear

left speakers.

4 RC

Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear

center speakers.

5 RR

Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear

right speakers.

6 SWFR

Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and

the subwoofer.

Setting

2spk

3spk

4spk

5spk

6spk

Display

L R

L C R

L R

RL RR

L C R

RL RR

L C R

RL RC RR

Speaker

Main L/Main R

Main L/Center/Main R

Main L/Main R/Rear L/

Rear R

Main L/Center/Main R/

Rear L/Rear R

Main L/Center/Main R/

Rear L/Rear Center/Rear R

0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM22

English

BASIC

OPERATION

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers you want to use.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B.

4 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of

the input selector buttons on the remote

control) to select the input source.

The selected input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.

To select the audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks

• Select the input to which the video source component is

connected before selecting an audio source.

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display.

Note

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other

source can be played. To select another input source, first

press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” disappears from the

front panel display.

PHONO

AUX

A B C

TV/CBL VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

POWER

DISC SKIP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

SPEAKERS

INPUT

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

VOLUME

L R

DVD AUTO

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM23

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to view images from a

video source together with sounds from an audio source.

For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music

while watching beautiful scenery from a video source on

the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group, then select a source

from the audio group using the input selector buttons on

the remote control.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume audio output, press

MUTE again.

• You can change the amount by which the unit reduces the

volume in “OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE” in the set menu.

• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOL +/–, etc.

• During muting, the MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel

display.

■ Night listening mode

This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the

volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low

volumes or at night.

Press NIGHT on the

remote control.

Press NIGHT once more to

return to normal reproduction.

Note

• Setting the unit in standby mode cancels night listening mode.

• You can use night listening mode with any of the sound field

programs.

• The NIGHT indicator on the front panel display lights when

the unit is in night listening mode.

• Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on

the input source and surround sound settings you use.

■ When you have finished using this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in standby

mode.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired level.

The volume level is displayed digitally.

Example: –70 dB

Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to

0 dB (maximum)

The volume level indicator also shows the current

volume level as a bar graph.

If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls

only effect the sound from the main speakers.

Notes

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left

and right speakers.

• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR 1

OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you

notice distortion or low volume during playback from other

components, try turning the recording component on.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 29 – 31 for details about DSP programs.

When using the remote control, press AMP to set the

remote control in AMP mode before selecting a DSP

program.

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel Remote control

MUTE

TREBLEBASS

VOL

PROGRAM

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

PLAYBACK

NIGHT

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM24

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Input modes and indications

This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks. You

can select the type of input signals you wish to use.

Each time you turn on the unit power, the input mode is

set to the “INPUT 2 INPUT MODE” setting defined in

the set menu.

Press INPUT MODE repeatedly until the

desired input mode is shown on the front

panel display.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected

automatically as follows:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals

encoded with DTS are selected, even if the

unit is receiving another signal

simultaneously.

ANALOG: In this mode, only analog input signals are

selected, even the unit is receiving digital

signals at the same time.

Notes

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines

the type of signal. If it detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,

the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting.

• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, there is a delay in sound output for

a moment when playback resumes after a search, because the

unit must select the digital signal again.

• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally

recorded, the unit may not output any sound for some LD

players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

Front panel

Input mode

■ Notes on digital signals

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96 kHz

sampling digital signals. Note the following when a

digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48

kHz:

• You cannot use any DSP programs.

• The unit will output sound as 2-channel stereo from the

main left and right speakers only. Therefore, you

cannot adjust the level of the effect speakers while

listening to such a source.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, the unit may not be able to

perform DTS decoding even if there is a digital

connection between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set

the input mode to ANALOG, the unit may reproduce

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case,

connect the source to a digital input jack on this unit

and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, the unit

does not output any sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– The unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up)

after detecting the DTS signal. When playback of

the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, the unit

can only reproduce DTS source. If you want to play

a normal PCM source immediately, change the input

mode back to AUTO.

– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search

or skip operation is performed during playback of a

DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this

state continues for longer than 30 seconds, the unit

will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

VOLUME

L R

DVD AUTO

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM25

Selecting a sound field program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

29 – 31.

1 Press AMP to set the

remote control in AMP

mode.

2 Press one of the numeric buttons on the

remote control to select the desired

program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display.

AMP

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to cycle through

sub-programs if available.

Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 2

repeatedly switches the sub-program

between “Adventure” and

“General”.

Notes

• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this

unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal

format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input

signal formats.

• You cannot use the digital sound field processor with a source

connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit or when the

unit is reproducing a digital source with a sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.

Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the

effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in standby mode, it stores the current

source and DSP program in memory and automatically selects

them when you turn on the power again.

• If the unit receives a Dolby Digital or DTS signal when the

input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9)

automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When the unit is reproducing a monaural source with PRO

LOGIC or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie,

no sound is output from the main and rear speakers. Sound can

only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on

the set menu is set to NON, the center channel sound is output

from the main speakers.)

• You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM

l / h on the front panel.

• Select a program based on your listening preference. Program

names are just for reference.

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

PHONES

TREBLEBASS

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

PROGRAM l / h

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

2,3

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

Adventure

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

General

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM26

English

BASIC

OPERATION

The display cycles as follows each time you press q/

DTS SUR :

PRO LOGIC→PRO LOGIC Enhanced→PRO LOGIC II

Movie→PRO LOGIC II Music→Neo:6 Cinema→Neo:6

Music→PRO LOGIC→....

• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Enhanced, PRO

LOGIC II Movie, PRO LOGIC II Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and

Neo:6 Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front

panel repeatedly.

■ Playing Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

material

Press 6.1/5.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

decoder to listen to Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES

material with a rear center speaker.

Press 6.1/5.1 to choose the playback mode. (The modes

you can select vary depending on the format of the

material you are playing.)

AUTO: This mode automatically switches to Dolby

Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES

Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the

input source that the unit detects. The rear

center speaker does not output sound for 5.1

channel sources.

Discrete 6.1: This mode can only be selected only when

the unit detects a source encoded with the

DTS ES Discrete format. (The DISCRETE

indicator lights up.)

Matrix 6.1: This mode allows for 6-channel playback of

the input source through the Matrix 6.1

decoder. (Either

or MATRIX

indicator lights up.)

OFF: The rear center speaker does not output

sound in this mode.

Notes

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

that this unit can automatically detect. Select “Matrix 6.1” to

play these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel sound.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press 6.1/5.1

in the following cases:

1 When “1C REAR LR” is set to NON.

2 When effects are turned off.

3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is

being played.

4 When the unit is reproducing a Dolby Digital KARAOKE

source.

5 When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The input mode resets to AUTO when you turn the unit power

off.

■ Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or

Neo:6

You can listen to 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO

LOGIC II or Neo:6 in program No. 9.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 Press AMP to set the

remote control in AMP

mode.

3 Press q/DTS SUR.

AMP

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

PHONES

TREBLEBASS

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

PROGRAM l / h

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

(Example)

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

MATRIX

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

Matrix 6.1

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

VOLUME

L R

PRO LOGIC

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM27

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the

center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker.

• If you turn off the sound effects while the unit is reproducing

sound from a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the dynamic range

of the signal is automatically compressed and the unit will

output mix the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels

and output them from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effects or if you set “SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic

range” on the set menu to MIN. In this case turn on the sound

effect.

• During stereo reproduction, you can display information such

as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input

from the components connected to this unit.

(While playing a source)

1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP

mode.

2 Press d to display the information about the

input signal.

(Format): The display shows the signal format. When the

unit cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in: The display shows the number of input signal

source channels, as follows: For multi-channel

soundtrack such as front 3 channels, rear 2

channels and LFE, the display shows “3/2/

LFE”.

For bilingual broadcasts where the signal is

split into 2 channels, the display shows “1+1”.

For signals with more than 3 channels the

display shows “MLT”.

fs: The display shows the sampling frequency.

When the unit is unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” shows in the front panel

display.

rate: The display shows the bit rate. When the unit is

unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” shows

in the front panel display.

flg: The display shows the flag - data encoded in a

DTS or Dolby Digital signal that causes this

unit to automatically switch to the appropriate

decoder for playback.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP

programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers

to reproduce a natural sound field.

You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C

REAR LR” in the set menu to NON. Sound field

processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP

automatically.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL, Pro Logic, Pro

Logic II, or DTS program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater

than 48 kHz is input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you

could expect from actual speakers through headphones,

with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT

CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the

PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is

on. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. (When sound effects are off, the unit reproduces

the source in normal stereo.)

Notes

• This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or

the unit is receiving a digital signal with a sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

• The sound from the LFE channel will be mixed and output

from the headphones.

■ Normal stereo reproduction

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound

effect for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound

effect back on.

STEREO

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

EFFECT

STEREO

PLAYBACK

0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:31 PM28

English

BASIC

OPERATION

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding sound fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

■ Recreating a sound field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.

Hi-Fi DSP programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT/

Disco

ENTERTAINMENT/

6ch Stereo

Features

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions

emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual

seat is near the center, close to the stage.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that

seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s

“hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The

sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”

sound.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties, etc.

0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:32 PM29

CINEMA-DSP

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby

Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic II decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder

for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder for adding a rear center channel. You can select

CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.

CINEMA-DSP Programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you

feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6

No.

Program

ENTERTAINMENT/

Game

MUSIC VIDEO

TV THEATER/

Mono Movie

TV THEATER/Variety/

Sports

Features

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an

actual jazz or rock concert.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound

field.

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound

environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV

programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:32 PM30

English

BASIC

OPERATION

CINEMA-DSP

■ For movie programs

No.

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It

precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field

incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of

science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the

silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest

movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as

possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,

and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the

echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

The built-in decoder reproduces source sounds and sound-effects precisely.

No DSP effect is applied in this program.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film

theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital

sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orienta-

tion.

The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from

the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

Program

Straight Decode

Enhanced Mode

Straight Decode

This unit is equipped with various precise decoders;

• Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound

• Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel

• Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources

Select any of the Straight Decode modes in Program 9 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced”) to use any of these

decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and

the DSP indicator turns off.

Note

• When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the main

and rear speakers output effect sounds.

0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:32 PM31

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

CINEMA-DSP

Sound field effects

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby

Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround, and right surround channels. This

processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense

sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-

or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the

clear separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear

center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie material has 4-channel (left, center, right, and

surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.

These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed

to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of

sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding

processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6

This unit comes with Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6 decoders which decode 2-channel Dolby Surround data into

five or six full range channels. Both decoders have two modes, MOVIE/CINEMA for movies, and MUSIC for 2-

channel sources.

0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:32 PM32

English

BASIC

OPERATION

TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency.

When the unit is tuned in to a station, the “TUNED”

indicator lights up and the frequency of the station

received is shown on the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you are trying to select is

weak, you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” at left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

until the “AUTO” indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING

l / h to tune in to the

desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

There are 2 methods of tuning; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press TUNER

on the remote control) to select TUNER as

the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

AUTO

Lights up

Front panel Remote control

AUTO

Disappears

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

233

INPUT

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

FM/AM

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

TUNED

A AM 1530 kHz

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM33

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

1 32

Presetting stations

■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM

stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. You can then recall any preset station

easily by selecting the preset number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

until the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for at least 3 seconds.

The preset number and the “MEMORY” and

“AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning starts, beginning at the

frequency currently displayed and moving toward the

higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

AUTO

Lights up

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

described in “Manually presetting stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode,

the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or

the power supply is temporarily cut due to power

failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one

week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store

the stations again.

FM/AM

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

TUNING

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 89.9 MHz

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM34

English

BASIC

OPERATION

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset group and number you

have selected.

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

■ Manually presetting stations

You can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)

manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 33 for tuning instructions.

When tuned to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) is

showing on the front panel display.

MEMORY

Flashes

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

2,5

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

TUNING

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

C:AM 1440 kHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

Preset group

Preset number

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM35

■ Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.

The example below describes the procedure for

exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting a preset station” at left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

at least 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting a preset station

You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band and

frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

Shows the exchange of stations has been

completed.

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

2,4

1,31,3

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORY

EDIT E1-A5

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM36

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in standby

mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off the external component(s)

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation

instructions of the timer.

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below.

3 The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front

panel display soon after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

SLEEP

SLEEP TIMER

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this

unit in standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote

control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by

disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet.

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

POWER

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

DSP

HiFi

SLEEP

VOLUME

L R

SLEEP 120min

V-AUXVCR1

VCR2/DVR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD PHONO

DSP

HiFi

SLEEP

VOLUME

L R

ROCK CONCERT

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM37

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed on other recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components for details on

their operation .

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Front panel Remote control

RECORDING

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in standby mode, you cannot record

between the components connected to it.

• DSP programs and volume, bass, and treble settings do not

affect the recorded material.

• You cannot record from a source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks on this unit.

• Input sources are not output to the same OUT (REC) channel.

(For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output to

VCR 1 OUT.)

• This unit’s DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT(REC)

jacks are independent. To record a source using a digital

recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack, connect the source component to one of the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

• Check the copyright laws in your country if you wish to

record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of

copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS material

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, follow the

operating instructions of your player to set it to output an

analog signal, if it is compatible with the DTS format.

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

OPTICALRAUDIOLVIDEOS VIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

TREBLE

VOLUME

BASS

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

SET MENU

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

POWER

INPUT

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 03.1.10, 6:33 PM38

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Adjusting the items on the set

Use the remote control to make adjustments.

• You can change set menu parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

• You can use NEXT and SET MENU +/– on the front panel to

change these settings, if the unit is not set to TUNER mode.

Press NEXT to select the category or field you wish to change,

and SET MENU +/– to change the parameters.

Note

• You cannot change some set menu parameters while the unit is

in night listening mode.

1 Press AMP to set the

remote control in AMP

mode.

2 Press SET MENU to enter

the set menu.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the desired

menu.

4 Press j / i to enter the selected menu.

5 Press u / d repeatedly to select the item

you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in

the same order as when pressing d.

AMP

SET MENU

You can set the following parameters on the set menu to

obtain a better sound from the unit. Change the settings to

reflect the needs of your listening environment.

Set menu list

The set menus are divided by use and function into the 4

categories listed here.

■ BASIC

The BASIC area contains the basic parameters that you

must set before using this unit. It consists of the following

menus. See pages 20 – 22 for a detailed explanation.

1 SETUP

2 SP LEVEL (Speaker level)

■ SOUND

The SOUND area contains parameters for altering sound

output. It consists of the following menus that you can

use to alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the

system.

1 SPEAKER SET

2 SP DISTANCE (Speaker distance)

3 LFE LEVEL (Low frequency effect level)

4 D. RANGE (Dynamic range)

CENTER GEQ (Center graphic equalizer)

6 HP TONE CTRL (Headphone tone control)

■ INPUT

The INPUT area contains parameters concerned with

signal input. It consists of the following menus that you

can use to change the assignment of input jacks, and

rename components.

1 I/O ASSIGN

2 INPUT MODE

3 INPUT RENAME

■ OPTION

This is a supplementary set up menu provided for your

convenience. It consists of the following menus that you

can use to change display brightness, protect existing

settings, and perform other non-essential functions.

1 DISPLAY SET

2 MEM. GUARD

3 AUDIO MUTE

4 ZONE SET

5 REC OUT (U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models only)

• In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the

default setting is indicated in bold.

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

4,6,7

3,5,8

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM39

6 Press j / i once to enter

the setup mode of the

selected item.

The last setting you adjusted

appears on the front panel

display.

Depending on the menu item,

press u/d to select a sub

item.

7 Press j / i repeatedly to

change the menu item

setting.

8 Press u / d repeatedly until the menu

disappears or just press one of the DSP

program group buttons to exit from the set

menu.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If this happens,

adjust the items again.

The BASIC and SOUND menus

The “BASIC” menu allows you to easily set the

“SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” and “SOUND 2 SP

DISTANCE” parameters. It is not necessary to reset

any of the parameters in the “BASIC” menu, but you

can access more detailed parameters in the “SOUND”

menu if you wish.

Note

• After altering parameters in the “SOUND” menu, if you

select “BASIC 1 SETUP” and then select “SET”, the

parameters from the “SOUND” menu alter in response to

any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. Do not enter

the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu unless you wish to change

these settings. If you accidentally enter the “BASIC 1

SETUP” menu, select CANCEL to return to the “BASIC”

menu. (page 21)

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET

(speaker mode settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Note

• Some menu item settings have no effect when the unit is

reproducing a source with a digital signal sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode)

If you add a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide better dialog localization for several

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the

center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The unit

directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of

the center channel to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. The unit

directs all of the center channel signal to the main left and

right speakers.

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

SET MENU

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM40

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The unit

directs the entire range of the main left and right channel

signals to the main left and right speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The unit

directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of

the main channel to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

rear left and right speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you

select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center

speaker will automatically be set to NON and the “1D REAR

CT” item will be skipped.

■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker mode)

If you add a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back transitions.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the rear center channel

signal to the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below)

of the rear center channel to the speakers selected with

“1E BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. The

unit directs all of the rear center channel signal to the rear

left and right speakers.

■ 1E BASS (bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals can be directed to both main left and

right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be

used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The unit directs the

LFE signals to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The unit directs

LFE signals to the main speakers.

BOTH

The unit directs LFE signals to the subwoofer. Low-

frequency signals designated to the main channels in

accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed

to both main speakers and the subwoofer.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the unit directs the

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main

speaker mode.

SET MENU

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM41

SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE

(speaker distance)

Use this feature to adjust the delay applied to center and

rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there

is sound output from the center speakers with a source

such as Dolby Digital or DTS. Ideally, the center speaker

and the rear speakers should be the same distance from

the main listening position as the left and right main

speakers. However, in most home situations, the center

speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line with

the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the

sound from the center speaker and the rear speakers, you

can adjust the apparent distance from the center speaker

and the rear speakers to the main listening position to

make it seem the same as the distance between the

listening position and main left and right speakers.

1 Press u / d to select “UNIT”.

2 Press j / i to select the unit “meters” or

“feet” to be used in setting.

3 Press u / d to select the speaker for which

you want to adjust the delay.

4 Press j / i to set the delay.

Press i for higher values and j for lower values.

■ Setting by “meters”

Control range: 0.3 to 24.00 m (for main L/R, center,

rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 2.10 m (for rear center)

■ Setting by “feet”

Control range: 1 to 80 ft (for main L/R, center, rear

L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 7.0 ft (for rear center)

Note

• No delay will be set if you set the same distance for the main

L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center.

SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries low-

frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range:

SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB

HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

1 Press u / d to select the item to be

adjusted.

2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

SOUND 4 D. RANGE

(dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)

MAX

Select MAX for feature films.

STD

Select STD for general use.

MIN

Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels.

SET MENU

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM42

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center

graphic equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that

frequency.

Note

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

parameter by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting

the foregoing procedure. Once you begin this procedure, the

test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how

the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels.

To stop the test tone, press TEST.

SOUND 6

HP TONE CTRL

(headphone tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you are using headphones.

Control range (dB):

BASS .................... –6 to +3

TRBL (treble) ....... –6 to +3

Initial setting:

BASS .................... 0 dB

TRBL .................... 0 dB

INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/

output assignment)

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or

DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from those of the component. This

lets you to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more components.

Once assigned, select that component with INPUT (or the

input selector buttons on the remote control).

■ 1A for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

Choices: [A] DVD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL

[B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

V-AUX, D-TV/CBL

■ 1B for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack

Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL,

DVD

■ 1C for OPTICAL INPUT jacks

Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL,

DVD

(3) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL,

DVD

(4) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL,

DVD

■ 1D for COAXIAL INPUT jack

Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL,

DVD

Notes

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

SET MENU

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM43

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

Use this to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting adjusts the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

■ GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting to

display a gray background when there is no video signal

input. Nothing is displayed on the screen, including the

on-screen display if you select OFF.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

Note

• If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information is displayed

on the screen when the unit is not receiving a video signal.

■ V CONV. (Video conversion)

(With the exception of China and General models)

Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of

composite signals to S-video signals to output through the

S-video jack when the unit is receiving a video signal that

is not in the S-video format.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video

signals.

OFF

Select OFF to stop the conversion of composite signals to

S-video signals.

INPUT 2 INPUT MODE

(initial input mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

this unit on (see page 25 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

AUTO

Select this setting to allow the unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

LAST

Select this setting to set this unit to automatically select

the last input mode used for the respective sources.

INPUT 3 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input name you want to change.

2 Press AMP and then use j / i to place the _

(under-bar) under the space or character you

want to edit.

3 Press u / d to select the character you want

to use and j / i to move to the next one.

• Press d to change the character in the following

order, or press u to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

SET MENU

3 INPUT RENAME

DVD -> DVD1

/ : Character

-/+ : Position

3 INPUT RENAME

DVD -> DVD

/ : Character

-/+ : Position

3 INPUT RENAME

DVD -> DVD

/ : Character

-/+ : Position

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM44

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD

(memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings

on the unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

• All set menu items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels

• DSP program parameters

Notes

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other set

menu items.

OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE

Adjusts the amount by which the MUTE function reduces

the output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –50dB, –20dB

MUTE

Completely halts all output of sound.

–50dB

Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 50dB.

–20dB

Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 20dB.

OPTION 4 ZONE SET

■ SP B (speaker B set)

Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

MAIN

Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the

speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set

in the main room.

ZONE B

Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned

OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers

including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and

the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only.

Notes

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit,

the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

OPTION 5 REC OUT

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

REC OUT jack settings.

Choices: SOURCE, ZONE 2

SOURCE

This setting outputs the source selected with the input

selector from the REC OUT jack.

ZONE 2

This setting outputs the source selected with the ZONE 2

selector from the REC OUT jack. Select this if you want

to use Zone 2 features.

SET MENU

0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM45

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other

manufacturers. To control other components, set up the remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes.

Control area

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

Å/ı/Ç buttons and input

selector buttons switch the

control area for each component.

* Å/ı/Ç buttons are to operate

the other components that are

not connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

Å...LD player

ı...CD recorder

Ç...TV

Component control area

You can control up to 12 different components by setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see page 50).

Å/ı/Ç buttons

and input

selector buttons

SELECT k/n switches control

to another component without

changing the input source on

this unit.

The display window will show

one of the following:

A, B, C, PHONO, V-AUX,

TUNER, MD/CDR, CD, TV/

CBL, VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY, SLEEP,

6CH INPUT, VOL

+/–, MUTE and

STEREO) function

in any mode.

Press AMP to

control this unit.

DISC SKIP

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

DISC SKIP

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR

CODE SET

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

DISC SKIP

POWER

REC

AUDIO

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

TEST

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

■ Controlling other component

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the

selected component appears in the display window.

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM46

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to

select the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

3 Press u / d to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press j / i. You can set a different

component from the input selector name.

Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE,

TUNER, AMP*, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR

*L:AMP

“Amplifier library” has two modes, as follows:

YPC: Select this if you do not want to use any Zone

2 features.

Zone 2: Select this if you want to use Zone 2

features.

• Zone 2 is only available in models for the U.S.A.,

Canada and Australia.

• The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is

“YPC”.

• You cannot assign “Amplifier library” to any of the

input selector buttons or Å/ı/Ç.

Notes

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Check to

see if the selected code works in step 4.

• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process cancels. If this happens, start again from step 2.

Setting the manufacturer code

You can control other components with the remote

control by setting the appropriate manufacturer code.

Codes can be set for each of the 12 component controls.

The following table shows factory-set component controls

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each.

CODE SET

Component

control

(buttons)

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

MD/CD-R

D-TV/CBL

VCR1

VCR2/DVR

DVD

Component category

(Library)

CD-R

VCR

TUNER

VCR

DVD

Manufacturer

Yamaha-2

Yamaha

–

Yamaha-1

–

Yamaha-3

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM47

RE-NAME

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

RE-NAME

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If

you can, the manufacturer code is correct.

• If you want to continue setting up codes for other components,

press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press CODE SET again to exit from the setup

mode.

Note

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press any

buttons other than those indicated in each step, or when you

press more than one button at once.

Changing the source name in the

display window

You can change the source name that appears in the

display window on the remote control if you want to use a

different name than the factory preset. This is useful when

you have set the input selector buttons to control different

components.

1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to

select the source component to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press RE-NAME using a

ballpoint pen or similar

object.

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

MUTE

POWER

CODE SET

3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.

Pressing d changes the character in the following

order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and /

(slash). (Pressing u changes characters in the

reverse order.)

4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next

position.

Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed.

• If you want to continue setting up codes for other components,

press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the

renaming mode.

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM48

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. If this happens, start again from step 2.

5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

Note

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press any

buttons other than those indicated in each step, or more than

one button at once.

Clears all renamed source names

in the display window.

Clears all setup manufacturer

codes and renamed source

names. This returns the unit to the

default factory settings.

(L: component name) Clears

setup manufacturer code for the

component control.

Clearing renamed source names,

and setup manufacturer codes

1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to

select the component control for which you

want to clear the name, function or

manufacturer code.

2 Press CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process cancels. If this happens, start again from

step 1.

3 Press u / d to select the clear mode.

The mode cycles in the display window in the

following order:

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

PHONO

AUX

TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

TUNER

CD-R

CLEAR

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM49

Controlling other components

You can operate other components if you have set the

manufacturer code for your component in the remote

control. Note, however, that some buttons may not

operate the component correctly.

Once you select an input source, the remote control

switches to the mode for operating the component. You

can also select a component to operate other than the one

selected as the input source by pressing SELECT k/n.

The display window shows the currently selected

component that you can operate.

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or Ç. When the

manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and Ç areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1.

DISC SKIP

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

TV POWER

REC/DISC SKIP

3 w

4 e

TITLE/TV INPUT

TV VOL +/u

TV VOL –/d

CH +/i

CH –/j

TV MUTE/SELECT

7 RETURN

8 1-11

9 AV POWER

0 AUDIO

q r

MENU/A/B/C/D/E

e DISPLAY

12/CHP/INDEX

DVD player

TV power

Disc skip

Play

Skip forward

Skip backward

Pause

Stop

Search backward

Title

Down

Right

Left

Select

Return

Numeric buttons

Power

Audio

Search forward

Display

Title/Index

VCR

TV power

Rec

Play

Pause

Stop

Search backward

TV input

TV volume up

TV volume down

VCR channel up

VCR channel down

TV mute

Numeric buttons

Power

Search forward

Enter

TV, digital/cable TV

TV power

VCR rec

VCR play

VCR pause

VCR stop

VCR search backward

TV input

TV volume up

TV volume down

TV channel up

TV channel down

TV mute

Numeric buttons

VCR power

VCR search forward

Enter

LD player

TV power

Play

Skip forward

Skip backward

Pause

Stop

Search backward

TV input

TV volume up

TV volume down

TV channel up

TV channel down

TV mute

Numeric buttons

Power

Sound

Search forward

Display

Chapter/Time

CD player

TV power

Disc skip

Play

Skip forward

Skip backward

Pause

Stop

Search backward

TV input

TV volume up

TV volume down

TV channel up

TV channel down

TV mute

Numeric buttons

Power

Search forward

Display

Index

CD/MD recorder

TV power

Rec (MD)

Play

Skip forward

Skip backward

Pause

Stop

Search backward

TV input

TV volume up

TV volume down

TV channel up

TV channel down

TV mute

Numeric buttons

Power

Search forward

Display

Index

Tuner

TV power

Preset up

Preset down

Preset stations (1-8)

Power

A/B/C/D/E

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM50

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Using the test tone

Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume

from each speaker is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP

mode.

Check that “AMP” is showing on the remote control

display.

2 Press TEST.

The unit will output a test tone.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a speaker

to adjust.

Each time you press d, the unit will cycle through

the speakers in the following order:

TEST LEFT(main L)→TEST CENTER(center)→TEST

RIGHT(main R)→TEST R SUR.(rear R)→TEST

REAR CNTR(rear center)→TEST L SUR.(rear

L)→TEST SUBWOOFER(subwoofer)→.....

(Press u to cycle the speakers in the reverse order.)

4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

5 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone halts.

Notes

• You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the

PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

• You cannot adjust speaker volumes if the “SOUND 1

SPEAKER SET” parameter on the set menu is set to NON.

• You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS”

parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is

set to MAIN.

• If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then

select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any

changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”.

• Depending on the source the unit is reproducing, the speaker

levels set with the test tone may not be to your liking. If this is

the case, adjust the speaker levels while listening to the

source.

SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS

Adjusting the volume during

playback

You can adjust the volume of the speakers while listening

to sound playback.

1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP

mode.

Check that “AMP” is showing on the remote control

display.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

The unit cycles through the speakers in the following

order each time you press LEVEL:

MAIN L→CENTER→MAIN R→R SUR.

(rear R)→REAR CT (rear center)→L SUR.

(rear L)→SWFR (subwoofer)→.....

• Pressing LEVEL once opens the level display. Press u / d at

this time to select a speaker.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volume.

• The center and rear speakers can be adjusted by a

maximum of –10dB ~ +10dB.

• The main speakers and subwoofer can be adjusted

by a maximum of –20dB ~ 0dB.

Notes

• You cannot adjust speaker levels if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER

SET” parameter in the set menu is set to NON.

• You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS”

parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is

set to MAIN.

• If you use LEVEL to adjust speaker levels, the speaker levels

you previously set with the test tone will also change.

• If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then

select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any

changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”.

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

ROCK ENTER-

POWER

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

ROCK ENTER-

POWER

2,5

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM51

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

CD INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL IN

ZONE 2 OUT

ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)

You can make up a multi-room audio system with this unit.

Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must

connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit.

To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment:

• An amplifier and speakers for the second room

• An infrared signal receiver in the second room

• An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room

(for example, to a CD player or DVD player).

• Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products,

you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected.

Note

• Using the unit in Zone 2 mode affects the signal that the unit outputs from the VCR 2/DVR OUT jacks. Do not use these jacks if you

wish to use Zone 2 functionality.

Example of a system configuration and connections

Main room

Infrared signal

receiver

Remote control

Second room

Amplifier

Infrared emitter

This unit

CD player

(or other component)

■ To enable Zone 2 mode

Set “OPTION 5 REC OUT” to ZONE 2 on the set menu.

• The ZONE 2 indicator on the front panel display appears when Zone 2 power is on, even if the main unit is in standby

mode.

■ Special considerations for playing DTS encoded materials

When playing DTS encoded materials, the analog output jacks of the source component may output excessive noise that

could damage your speakers. Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and

adjustments need to be made.

For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals will be sent to the second room. Set your player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

For CDs encoded with DTS

DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise.

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM52

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 You can control the component by using the

component control area buttons.

5 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2

mode.

Notes

•

The MUTE button on the remote control works for the second

room. However Zone 2 volume cannot be adjusted with the remote

control. Use the control on the amplifier in the second room.

• CODE SET, CLEAR and RENAME will not function when

the remote control is set to ZONE 2 mode.

■ When you have finished using the unit

To set both the main unit and the Zone 2 in

standby mode

1 Press SELECT n to display “SYSTM” in the

display window.

2 Press STANDBY.

• The SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY works differently

depending on the selected mode that appears on the display

window.

Notes

• To change the remote control to MAIN mode, press SELECT

k / n repeatedly if necessary to display a name of a

component on the display window.

• When the remote control is in SYSTEM mode, pressing any

button other than SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY returns

the remote to the previous mode.

ZONE 2 (FOR U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS)

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

PHONO

AUX

A B C

TV/CBL VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

DISC SKIP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

Remote Control in Zone 2

You can use the supplied remote control in a second room

(Zone 2), as the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the

input source and control components located in the main

room directly from the second room regardless of the

listening conditions in the main room.

■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote

control

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”.

3 Press u / d to select “ZONE2”.

4 Press CODE SET to complete the Zone 2

setup.

Immediately after you have configured the remote

control for Zone 2, the remote will be to MAIN

mode. When the remote is in MAIN mode, you can

turn the main unit on, or set it in standby mode

independently of the Zone 2 by pressing SYSTEM

POWER or STANDBY (“MAIN” appears on the

display window for 2 seconds.)

■ To use the remote control in Zone 2

1 Press SELECT k to display “ZONE2” in the

display window.

Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power on.

3 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.

Note

• You cannot select VCR 2/DVR as the input source.

LCD Display

“AMP” or name of

component (ex. DVD)

“ZONE2” or “2:name of

component (ex. 2:DVD)”

“SYSTM”

SYSTEM POWER/

STANDBY

turn the main unit

on/standby

turn the Zone2 on/

standby

turn both the main

unit and Zone2 on/

standby

MAIN mode

ZONE2 mode

SYSTEM mode

0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:35 PM53

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What is a sound field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any

particular environment, and provide vital information to

our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct

sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound field program parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters. However, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound field by starting with

one of the built-in program and adjusting its parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to create the precise effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create

the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or

other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM54

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

4 Press u / d to select the

parameter.

5 Press j / i to change the

parameter value.

• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor. To reset to the factory-set value, press j

/ i repeatedly until the asterisk mark disappears.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Notes

• For some of the programs, the available parameters may be

displayed on more than one OSD page. To scroll through

pages, press u / d.

• You cannot change parameter values when “OPTION 2 MEM.

GUARD” on the set menu is set to ON.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode,

the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or

the power supply is temporarily cut due to power

failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one

week, the parameter value you edited will return to the

factory setting. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

Changing parameter settings

You can enjoy high quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

Use the remote control to make adjustments.

• It is advisable to use on-screen display when changing the

settings.

1 Press AMP to set the

remote control in AMP

mode.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

AMP

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

P03 ROCK CONCERT

≥

INIT.DLY…………15ms

DSP LEVEL…………0dB

ROOM SIZE…………1.0

LIVENESS…………………5

REV.TIME…………1.6s

REV.DELAY……120ms

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

Program No.

The parameter setting display

Parameters

Cursor

Program name

Parameter values

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

DISC SKIP

POWER

AMP

REC

AUDIO

VOL

TV INPUT

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

TV MUTE

SELECT

MUTE

TEST

ON SCREEN

STEREO

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

PRESET PRESET

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

POWER

HALL JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

1234

5678

9101112

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

CHP/INDEX

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM55

2.00.1

Sound source

TimeTimeTime

Early

reflections

Sound source

Level

■ ROOM SIZE

[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field]

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0

99 ms1 ms

Reflection face

Sound source

TimeTime Time

INIT.DLYINIT.DLY

INIT.DLY

Early

reflections

Level

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB

■ INIT. DLY (Initial delay)

[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field]

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a

large room, it would be set to a large value.

Control Range: 1 to 99 msec

Sound source

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM56

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when the unit is using at least two front and two

rear channels.

Control range: 1 to 49 msec

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear center initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

Control range: 1 to 49 msec

■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear center room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear center liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

100

Large

reflected sound

Small reflected

sound

Sound source

Live

TimeTimeTime

Dead

Sound source

Level

■ LIVENESS

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Control range: 0 to 10

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM57

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Time

REV. LEVEL

Sound source

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Time

REV. TIMEREV.

DELAY

Reverberation

Sound source

Level

■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound give the

impression of being in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 msec

5.0 s1.0 s

Sound source

REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME

Early reflections

ReverberationSound sourceReverberation

■ REV. TIME (Reverberation time)

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1

kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time

for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 sec

Long

reverberation

Short

reverberation

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM58

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

For 6ch Stereo

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

■ CT LEVEL (Center level)

■ RL LEVEL (Rear left level)

■ RR LEVEL (Rear right level)

■ RC LEVEL (Rear center level)

For PRO LOGIC II Music

■ PANORAMA

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

■ DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For DTS Neo:6 Music

■ C. IMAGE (Center Image)

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control Range: 0 – 0.5

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:36 PM59

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in standby

mode soon after the

power has been

turned on.

On-screen display

does not appear.

No sound.

The picture does not

appear.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on

the rear panel is not fully set to either the

left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

The setting for the on-screen display is set

to “DISPLAY OFF”.

The GRAY BACK setting under

“OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set

menu is set to OFF, and no video signal is

currently being received.

Incorrect input or output cable connec-

tions.

No appropriate input source is selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers have not been selected

properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

Digital signals which this unit cannot

reproduce are being received from a

source component e.g; a CD-ROM.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Connect the power cord firmly.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when

this unit is in standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection is not touching anything other than

its respective connection.

Set this unit in standby mode, disconnect the power

cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it

normally.

Select the full display or short display mode.

Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or

6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).

Secure the connections.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to

cancel mute and adjust the volume.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Connect components using the same type of video

jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPO-

NENT VIDEO) for both the input and output.

Refer to

page

–

16 – 17

–

10 – 17

16 – 17

–

10 – 11

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM60

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Poor bass

reproduction.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has turned the unit off.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

The sound effect is switched off.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoding DSP program is being used with

material not encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

A digital signal with a sampling

frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to

this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“SOUND 1A CENTER” on the set menu

is set to NON.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)

has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo).

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

The output level of the rear speakers is set

to minimum.

A monaural source is being played with

program 9.

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel

source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to SWFR or BOTH and your system

does not include a subwoofer.

The speaker mode settings (main, center,

rear, or rear center) on the set menu does

not match your speaker configuration.

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to

the appropriate position and then turn the unit back

on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn the unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

Select another DSP program.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Select BOTH.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate position for each speaker based

on the size of the speakers in your configuration.

Refer to

page

–

16 – 17

–

26 – 31

–

26 – 31

–

26 – 31

–

40 – 41

TROUBLESHOOTING

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM61

Problem

No sound from the rear

center speaker.

A “humming” sound can

be heard.

The volume level is low

while playing a record.

The volume level cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The sound effect cannot

be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of

this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on the

unit cannot be changed.

The unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

There is noise interfer-

ence from digital or

high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

The unit suddenly turns

into standby mode.

Cause

“SOUND 1C REAR LR” or “SOUND 1D

REAR CT” on the set menu is set to NON.

The Dolby Digital EX or the DTS-ES

decoder is not switched on.

Incorrect cable connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

There is no source component connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

“OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set

menu is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

The speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

The internal temperature has become too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Remedy

Select LRG or SML.

Press 6.1/5.1 on the remote control to switch the

decoder on.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to

the GND terminal of this unit.

The turntable should be connected to this unit

through an MC-head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks of this unit.

Set “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu

to OFF.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

Wait until the unit cools down and then turn it

back on.

Refer to

page

–

10 – 12

–

TROUBLESHOOTING

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM62

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Tuner

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

Cause

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

The unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Re-store the stations.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Refer to

page

–

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control does

not work nor function

properly.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacture code has not correctly

set.

Even if the manufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Reposition this unit.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

Set the code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same manufac-

turer.

Refer to

page

–

TROUBLESHOOTING

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM63

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for

dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-

channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1

center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead

of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital

Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to

existing 5.1-channel format.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by a specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range of channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed using headphones.

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM64

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in

order to use the component signal for output.

GLOSSARY

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM65

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 90 W

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 110 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 140 W

• IEC Power

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 105 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 130 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 130/160/190/235 W

[Other models] ................................................ 120/145/185/230 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 100 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to OUT (REC) (5 mV, shorted)

[U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models] ....... 86 dB

[Other models] ................................................................... 81 dB

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT MAIN/CENTER/REAR CENTER/

REAR (SURROUND) ............................................ 2.4 V/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2 [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] .. 150 mV/1.5 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 30 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Usable sensitivity (IHF, Mono) ............................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz

[Korea model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 320 W/420 VA

[Other models] ..................................................................... 320 W

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.9 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]

.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

..................... 435 x 171 x 390 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”)

• Weight ............................................................ 13.0 kg (28 lbs 11 oz)

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM66

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WA69310

0100RX-V740-cv4_EN-U.p65 03.1.10, 6:15 PM1

Transcripción de documentos

U RX-V740 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL 0100RX-V740-cv1_EN-U.p65 1 03.1.10, 6:15 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, I CAUTION 0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 2 03.1.10, 6:19 PM d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II 0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 3 03.1.10, 6:19 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. III CAUTION 0101RX-V740_Cau_EN-U.p65 4 03.1.10, 6:19 PM CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................... 9 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 19 BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS ............................. 20 Using the basic menu .............................................. 20 Setting the unit to match your speaker system ........ 22 Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) ............. 22 Set menu list ............................................................ 39 Adjusting the items on the set menu ....................... 39 SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ...................................... 40 SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) ........ 42 SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL .......................................... 42 SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ................. 42 SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .................................... 43 SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) .................................... 43 INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .. 43 INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ........ 44 INPUT 3 INPUT RENAME .................................... 44 OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET ...................................... 44 OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ......... 45 OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE ..................................... 45 OPTION 4 ZONE SET ........................................... 45 OPTION 5 REC OUT ............................................. 45 BASIC OPERATION Before connecting components ................................. 9 Connecting video components ................................ 10 Connecting audio components ................................ 12 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 13 Connecting an external amplifier ............................ 14 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 14 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 15 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18 Turning on the power .............................................. 18 SET MENU ........................................................... 39 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46 Control area ............................................................. 46 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47 Changing the source name in the display window .. 48 Clearing renamed source names, and setup manufacturer codes ............................................. 49 Controlling other components ................................. 50 SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS ................ 51 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK .......................................................... 23 Input modes and indications .................................... 25 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ............................................................................ 29 CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30 CINEMA-DSP Programs ........................................ 30 Sound field effects ................................................... 32 TUNING ................................................................ 33 Presetting stations .................................................... 34 Selecting a preset station ......................................... 36 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 37 RECORDING ....................................................... 38 ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) .............................................................. 52 Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 53 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING .......................................................... 54 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29 ADVANCED OPERATION Adjusting the volume during playback ................... 51 Using the test tone ................................................... 51 What is a sound field? ............................................. 54 Sound field program parameters ............................. 54 Changing parameter settings ................................... 55 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ........... 56 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 60 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 64 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 66 English 1 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 1 03.1.10, 6:28 PM FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 90 W + 90 W Center: 90 W Rear: 90 W + 90 W Rear center: 90 W Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Other features ◆ 96 kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ Set menu for optimizing this unit for your Audio/ Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ On screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Video Conversion (Composite Video ⇔ S Video) ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ◆ Custom Installation Zone 2 Facility (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) ◆ Zone B capability Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 2 03.1.10, 6:28 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained. Remote control TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT PHONO A B C V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) AMP REC AUDIO Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) DISC SKIP VOL SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST RETURN MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E CH PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 Installing batteries in the remote control Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 2 1 3 Press the part marked with a and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four batteries supplied (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 1 ■ Notes on batteries 3 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 3 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 90 q VOLUME INPUT RDS MODE/FREQ STANDBY /ON EON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT PTY SEEK MODE START TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING TREBLE NEXT SET MENU o p B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES w BASS VIDEO AUX SILENT e r t RDS MODE/FREQ y u VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL i EON PTY SEEK MODE START as df (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns the unit on, or sets it in standby mode. When you turn the unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before it can reproduce sound. Standby mode In this mode, the unit uses a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 5 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 6 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of the unit. 7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. 2 INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) received when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. You cannot set priority for an audio source if you have selected 6CH INPUT as the input source. 8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. 3 INPUT Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 9 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 4 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This selection takes priority over sources selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in memory. q VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 4 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 4 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS e SPEAKERS A/B Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on or off. r STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When you select STEREO, the unit mixes down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effects, to the main left and right speakers. t PROGRAM l / h Select the DSP program. y A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E when the unit is in tuner mode. (U.K. and Europe models only) a RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station, to cycle the display mode among PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or frequency display mode in turn. INTRODUCTION w SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you to enjoy DSP effects when listening with headphones. When you connect headphones to the headphone jack, no signals are output to the speakers or the OUTPUT jacks. s PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. d PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. f EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. NEXT Selects the set menu mode when the unit is not in tuner mode. u PRESET/TUNING l / h Select preset station numbers 1 to 8 when a colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display. Select the tuning frequency when a colon (:) is not displayed when the unit is in tuner mode. SET MENU –/+ Adjust settings on the set menu when the unit is not in tuner mode. i VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source to V-AUX to select source signals from these jacks. o BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or left to decrease the lowfrequency response. p TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or left to decrease the highfrequency response. English 5 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 5 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the controls and functions of the remote control. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before use. POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT w e r t A B C PHONO y V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 1 2 TRANSMIT 3 SYSTEM RE-NAME CLEAR CODE SET 4 5 6 7 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of the unit. 3 STANDBY Sets the unit in standby mode. 5 Å/ı/Ç Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. u AMP i REC o AUDIO 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. DISC SKIP 6 Input selector buttons Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. 7 Display window Shows the source component you are currently controlling. VOL 8 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to adjust. 8 TITLE TV INPUT 9 SET MENU LEVEL CH TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST 0 RETURN MUTE p MENU A/B/C/D/E a CH s PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN STEREO d DISPLAY EFFECT q HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 ENTERTAINMENT 4 7 8 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 0 TEST Outputs a test tone for use when adjusting the speaker levels. q DSP program Select DSP programs when the remote control is in AMP mode. Press one of these buttons repeatedly to select a DSP program within a program group. MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 NIGHT 9 Multi control section Used to change and implement settings. f g w RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window. e CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired using the rename features, and to set manufacturer codes. r CODE SET Used to set up manufacturer codes (see page 47). t SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. y 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 6 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 6 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS u SELECT k/n Set the remote to control a component other than the one selected with the input selector buttons. o VOL +/– Increase or decrease the volume level. VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES 30° 30° VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Approximately 6 m (20 feet) INTRODUCTION i AMP Switches the function of the same controls between AMP and the component selected using the input selector buttons. ■ Using the remote control CODE SET p MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. a SET MENU Selects the set menu mode. s ON SCREEN Displays the input or operation status on the on-screen display. d STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When you select STEREO the unit mixes down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effect sounds, to the main left and right speakers. f 6.1/5.1 Switches the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder on or off. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. g NIGHT Sets the unit in night listening mode. English 7 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 7 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 ES 2 3 VCR2/DVR MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL DIGITAL SILENT EX PCM PL PL ZONE2 4 VCR1 SP AB V-AUX D-TV/CBL 6 5 DVD MD/CD-R 7 TUNER 0 s q w e CD PHONO MUTE VOLUME PS PTY RT CT STEREO AUTO SLEEP EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY NIGHT HiFi DSP ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 9 8 r t (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) ft mS dB y u i o d L C R LFE RL RC RR p a (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Processor indicators The indicators for the various decoders light up when the decoders are in use. e HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a Hi-Fi DSP sound field program. 2 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. r CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 3 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected to the headphone jack. 4 Input source indicator Highlights the current input source with a cursor. 5 Sound field indicator Displays the sound field management the unit is using when you listen to a DSP sound field program. 6 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 8 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 9 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 0 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and the digital sound field processor is on. q SP A B indicator Lights up to indicate which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. w NIGHT indicator Lights up when the unit is set to night listening mode. t Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when you are adjusting or changing settings. y STEREO indicator Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal from a FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. u TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned to a radio station. i MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored in memory. o SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. p LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. a Input channel indicator The indicators for the appropriate sound channels light up when a digital signal from a source is played back. s ZONE2 (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Lights up when Zone 2 power is on. d RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 8 0102RX-V740_01-08_EN-U.P65 8 03.1.10, 6:28 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. Use digital connections if you wish to enjoy the multi-channel sound track of DVD material, etc. with DSP effects. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96 kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. Note This jack is reserved for factory use. Do not connect any equipment to this jack. • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard this unit may not function properly. REMOTE CONTROL jacks (page 52) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 9 – 12) OUTPUT jacks (page 14) Audio component jacks (page 12) Video component jacks (pages 10 – 11) SIGNAL GND COMPORNENT VIDEO PR AUDIO R DIGITAL INPUT CD PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component you wish to connect to this unit. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The jack names correspond to the names on the input selector. AUDIO R L PHONO VIDEO L VIDEO IN (PLAY) IN MD /CD-R VCR-1 OUT (REC) OUT IN OUT D-TV /CBL B 5 D-TV /CBL REMOTE CONTROL Y S VIDEO DVD CD PB DVD A MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L CENTER COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 DVD MD/CD-R 3 2 TUNER R MAIN REAR (SURROUND) REAR CENTER SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS AM ANT GND IN MAIN R A VCR 2 /DVR REAR (SURROUND) L B 75Ω UNBAL. OUT SURROUND FM ANT MD/CD-R OPTICAL 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT R SUB WOOFER CENTER 6CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT 6CH INPUT jacks (page 14) DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 12) MAIN L CENTER REAR CENTER VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT Antenna input terminals (page 13) ZONE 2 OUT jacks (page 52) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 17) AC OUTLETS (page 18) Speaker terminals (page 17) English 9 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 9 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks ■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable TV Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO 1 2 PR PB Y 3 1 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. 2 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achieves high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit color difference (PB, PR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. Use the commercially available cable type specified for connecting each jack. y • Signals received through the S VIDEO input jacks can be converted to composite signals in this unit and output through its VIDEO MONITOR OUT as well. • (With the exception of China and General models) Signals received through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu to ON. • When the unit receives signals through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks to suit your components by using “INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the set menu. • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from the AUDIO jacks. ■ Connecting a recording component Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks on this unit. Then connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Then connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. A second VCR or DVD recorder can be connected using the VCR 2/DVR jacks. Note • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. Signal flow inside this unit Output (MONITOR OUT) Input COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” is set to ON on the set menu. ■ Connecting a video monitor Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note • If you connect this unit with a source component using Component video jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using Component video jacks. 10 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 10 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT O L R DVD player AUDIO OUTPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT L AUDIO OUTPUT R VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT PREPARATION SIGNAL GND COMPORNENT VIDEO PB PR AUDIO R DIGITAL INPUT CD TV/digital TV/ cable TV AUDIO R L VIDEO L VIDEO PHONO DVD CD D-TV /CBL Y DVD A S VIDEO D-TV /CBL B 5 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL IN (PLAY) IN MD /CD-R VCR-1 OUT 4 DVD 3 OUT (REC) MD/CD-R 2 MAIN TUNER R MAIN REAR (SURROUND) REAR CENTE AM ANT GND IN A VCR 2 /DVR B 75Ω UNBAL. OUT SURROUND FM ANT MD/CD-R OPTICAL 1 MONITOR OUT R SUB WOOFER DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO CENTER MAIN S VIDEO 6CH INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT L R AUDIO INPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT VCR VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT Video monitor indicates audio signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables indicates video signal direction English 11 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 11 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS Notes Connecting audio components • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack only outputs digital signals, while the OUT (REC) jacks output analog signals only. ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack on this unit. y • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder ■ Connecting a turntable Connect the output jacks on your turntable to the PHONO jacks on this unit. PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ CD-R jack on this unit for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/ CD-R jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. Please note that this connection may increase noise with some record players. y • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. OUTPUT L R Turntable SIGNAL GND COMPORNENT V GND PR AUDIO R COAXIAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD AUDIO L R DVD A VIDEO L VIDEO S VIDEO D-TV /CBL B DVD PHONO 5 C MONITOR OUT D-TV /CBL CD COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 CD player DVD OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R 3 2 IN (PLAY) IN MD /CD-R VCR-1 OUT (REC) OUT TUNER AM ANT GND IN MAIN VCR 2 /DVR O 75Ω UNBAL. OUT SURROUND FM ANT O CD recorder or MD recorder OPTICAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER VIDEO S VIDEO 6CH INPUT indicates signal direction C O indicates coaxial cables indicates optical cables 12 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 12 03.1.10, 6:30 PM PB CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) PREPARATION TUNER AM ANT GND 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) 1 2 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) Unit: 6 (1/14) mm (inch) Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 Lead wire Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) Because the inter-station frequency FM/AM spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz 100kHz/10kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. 4 Clamp with pliers. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Snap the cover into place. FREQUENCY STEP English Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 13 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 13 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows. Note Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a component equipped with a multi-channel decoder and 6 channel output jacks such as a DVD/SACD player. • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, the SPEAKERS terminals also output signals. 1 2 IN MAIN VCR 2 /DVR 3 OUT SURROUND OUTPUT L MONITOR OUT CENTER SUB WOOFER VIDEO CENTER S VIDEO 6CH INPUT R MAIN REAR (SURROUND) REAR CENTER SUB WOOFER 4 5 1 MAIN jacks Main channel line output jacks. L CENTER Note R L R SURROUND • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS and TREBLE settings. SUBWOOFER 2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. MAIN DVD/SACD player Note • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, the unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot use DSP programs. 5 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The unit also directs the LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded to this jack based on your SPEAKER SET selections. Notes • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the settings of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on page 51). 14 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 14 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the speakers ■ Speakers This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Center speaker Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. PREPARATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions. ■ Speaker placement Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the rear left and right speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. However, it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Note • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear center), change the settings of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” items at the set menu to direct signals to other terminals you have connected speakers to. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers still create interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. English 15 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 15 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) in accordance with the markers on this unit, the speakers, and the speaker cables. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 2 4 5 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 4 Unscrew the knob. 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. Banana plug y (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) • You can also use banana plug connectors. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. (General model) Switch position Speaker Impedance level Main If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω/8 Ω or higher. Left Center, Rear Center, Rear Main* IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B : A+B : CENTER : REAR CENTER : REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Right Center, Rear Center, Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω/16 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. * [Canada model only] When the switch is set to right, you cannot use “A+B”. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch 16 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 16 03.1.10, 6:30 PM CONNECTIONS Main A speaker Right Left 1 2 SIGNAL GND PR AUDIO 3 4 5 AUDIO L R VIDEO L VIDEO PHONO DVD CD D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) IN MD /CD-R VCR-1 OUT (REC) OUT PB Y DVD A S VIDEO D-TV /CBL B 5 MONITOR OUT PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT Rear speaker Right Left COMPORNENT VIDEO R CD Subwoofer system OUTPUT L CENTER COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 DVD MD/CD-R 3 2 TUNER R MAIN REAR (SURROUND) REAR CENTER SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS AM ANT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON GND MAIN IN R A VCR 2 /DVR SURROUND MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER B 75Ω UNBAL. OUT L REAR (SURROUND) FM ANT MD/CD-R OPTICAL 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT R SUB WOOFER CENTER VIDEO MAIN L CENTER REAR CENTER S VIDEO 6CH INPUT 6 Right Left Main B speaker MAIN SPEAKERS terminals You can connect up to two speaker systems to these terminals. When using only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals. Center speaker 6 7 Rear center speaker 1 3 2 REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 4 7 5 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. This unit will direct low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. Notes 17 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 17 03.1.10, 6:30 PM English • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on page 51). CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cords Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 1 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM VOLTAGE SELECTOR INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON L MAIN A OR B : A+B : CENTER : REAR CENTER : REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR CODE SET SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT PHONO A B C V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD REAR CENTER SELECT (General model) POWER POWER TV AV AMP ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to a wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ......................................................... 100 W 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 18 18 Remote control The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 or 03.1.10, 6:30 PM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display operational information for this unit on a video monitor. It is much easier to see the available options and parameters on a monitor than by reading this information on the front panel display. ■ Selecting the OSD mode SELECT POWER y POWER TV • If a video source is playing, the OSD is superimposed over the video image. • The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when there is no video signal using “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu. You can select the amount of information shown in the on-screen display. Full display This mode shows the DSP program parameter settings continuously on the video monitor. Short display This mode briefly shows the front panel display message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows “DISPLAY OFF” at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. In this mode, no operational information is shown on the monitor, except when ON SCREEN is pressed. P01 CONCERT HALL ≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB INIT.DLY…………45ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………5 P01 Full display CONCERT HALL DSP LEVEL…………0dB Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME and other operational information is displayed at the bottom of the screen, in the same format as on the front panel display. • The set menu and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. AUDIO 2 + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN MUTE MENU – STEREO 3 DISPLAY EFFECT 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. Check that “AMP” is showing in the display on the remote control. 3 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. PREPARATION ■ OSD modes AMP AV REC Notes • The OSD will not display if your video monitor is only connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit. Be sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either the VIDEO or the S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. (When using two video monitors) • If you select video source from a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and the composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to two different monitors, the OSD is only displayed on the monitor connected to the S-video jacks. When there is no video signal input from source component, the OSD appears on both monitors. English 19 0103RX-V740_09-19_EN-U.p65 19 03.1.10, 6:30 PM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS The “BASIC” menu allows you to set some of the basic “SOUND” menu parameters with a minimum of effort. If you wish to configure the unit more precisely to suit your listening environment, use the more detailed parameters from the “SOUND” menu instead of those under the “BASIC” menu (See page 40). Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all parameters in the “SOUND” menu. 4 Using the basic menu SETUP Changes the speaker and amplifier settings to suit the size of the room you are using. Refer to “Setting the unit to match your speaker system” for more information. Use the remote control to make adjustments. • Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select the main speakers you want to use. • Make sure you disconnect headphones from this unit. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 SP LEVEL Adjusts the output levels of the speakers. Refer to “Setting speaker output levels” for more information. REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST RETURN MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E CH ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 2 4,7 PRESET TV VOL 10 0 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 3,5 5 6 Press j / i to enter the desired setting mode. 7 Press u / d to exit from the set menu. The front panel display changes in the following order: MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX Press u / d to change the display to the setting you want to alter. 12 1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. Check that “AMP” is showing in the display on the remote control. 2 Press SET MENU. “BASIC MENU” appears on the front panel display, as shown here. Change the unit settings to suit your listening environment. When you have finished, the unit will automatically return to the basic menu. Exit + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL SET MENU – BASIC MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E If the front panel display changes to show anything other than “BASIC MENU”, press u until it displays “BASIC MENU”. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 3 Exit Press j / i to enter into the BASIC menu. The front panel display changes as shown here: + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 1 SETUP CH + PRESET TV VOL – 20 0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 20 ↑ BASIC ↓↑ SOUND ↓↑ INPUT ↓↑ OPTION ↓ 03.1.10, 6:31 PM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS SET MENU BASIC SOUND INPUT OPTION 2 SP LEVEL Press j / i to alter the settings for each parameter. Use d to move to the next setting. Press j / i to adjust the balance between each speaker and the left main speaker. Use d to move to the next setting. 1 ROOM 1 L-R Choose from S/M/L. Adjust the balance between the main left and right speakers. 2 SUBWOOFER 2C Choose either of YES/NONE. Adjust the balance between the main left and center speakers. 3 SPEAKERS 3 RL Choose from 2/3/4/5/6 spk. Adjust the balance between the main left and rear left speakers. CANCEL 4 SET/CANCEL 4 RC Choose either of SET/CANCEL. SET YES PREPARATION 1 SETUP Adjust the balance between the rear left and rear center speakers. NO 5 CHECK OK: 5 RR Choose either of YES/NO. Adjust the balance between the rear left and rear right speakers. 6 SWFR Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and the subwoofer. English • After altering the “1 SETUP” parameters, readjust the output levels of the speakers at “2 SP LEVEL”. • See pages 39 – 45 for a detailed explanation of the “SOUND”, “INPUT” and “OPTION” menus. 21 0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 21 03.1.10, 6:31 PM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS Setting the unit to match your speaker system Follow the instructions below to set the amplifier output to match the size of your room and speakers. Press u / d to cycle through parameters 1 through 4, and j / i to alter the parameter setting. Factory default settings are highlighted. 1 ROOM Settings: S, M ,L Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: [U.S.A. and Canada models] S: 16ft. x 3ft., 200sq.ft. (4.8 x 4m, 20m2) M: 20ft. x 16ft., 300sq.ft. (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L: 26ft. x 19ft., 450sq.ft. (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) 2 SUBWOOFER Settings: YES, NONE Select YES if you have a subwoofer in your system, or NONE if you do not. 3 SPEAKERS Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (spk) Select the number of speakers you wish to use in your speaker configuration. This number does not include your subwoofer. Speaker Display 5 Use the test tone to check the speaker levels. When you select SET in 4, the display changes to “CHECK: TestTone”, and the unit outputs a test tone to each of the speakers in turn. When the test tone begins, the display changes to “CHECK OK: YES”. If the volume of the test tone varies between speakers, press j / i to change the display to “NO”. The unit will automatically enter the “2 SP LEVEL” mode. If the test tone is output at the same volume from all of the speakers, select “CHECK OK: YES”. The unit will exit from the SETUP menu. Notes • The unit cycles the test tone around each of the speakers in turn twice. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front panel display. [Other models] S: 3.6m x 2.8m, 10m2 M: 4.8m x 4.0m, 20m2 L: 6.3m x 5.0m, 30m2 Setting 4 SET or CANCEL Select SET to confirm the changes you made to the above three settings. The unit will output a test tone to the speakers (see 5). Alternatively, select CANCEL to exit this menu without altering any of the unit settings. Use this menu to compare and adjust the test tone output from each speaker to the output from the left main (or left rear) speaker so that the volume level for all speakers is identical. Press u / d to select a speaker, then adjust the balance using j / i . Note • The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker and the left main (or left rear) speaker in turn. The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front panel display. 2spk L 3spk L C R Main L/Center/Main R 1 L-R Adjusts the balance between the main left and right speakers. 4spk L R RL RR Main L/Main R/Rear L/ Rear R 2 C Adjusts the balance between the main left and center speakers. Main L/Center/Main R/ Rear L/Rear R 3 RL Adjusts the balance between the main left and rear left speakers. Main L/Center/Main R/ Rear L/Rear Center/Rear R 4 RC Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear center speakers. 5spk R L C R RL 6spk Main L/Main R Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) RR L C R RL RC RR 5 RR Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear right speakers. 6 SWFR Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and the subwoofer. 22 0104RX-V740_20-22_EN-U.p65 22 03.1.10, 6:31 PM PLAYBACK 1 44 4 6 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY INPUT AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE B C V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO TREBLE BASS VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES 3 4 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL or 6 7 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR Front panel 4 Remote control CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A B C PHONO TV VCR2/DVR AV V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD TITLE POWER TV AV TV INPUT CH AMP TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST REC RETURN 6 HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME AUTO L R Selected input source CH ON SCREEN To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks • Select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting an audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT MUSIC VIDEO DVD MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL D-TV/CBL ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 12 7 CHP/INDEX Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. 6CH INPUT BASIC OPERATION SET MENU LEVEL SELECT V-AUX DVD DISC SKIP VOL POWER VCR1 SP A REC AUDIO 1 A 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 3 Front panel or Remote control Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers you want to use. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. English 23 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 23 03.1.10, 6:31 PM PLAYBACK 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to view images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while watching beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD VOLUME or BASS TREBLE ■ To mute the sound VOL Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume audio output, press MUTE again. Remote control MUTE y Front panel Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback from other components, try turning the recording component on. 7 Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 29 – 31 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX • You can change the amount by which the unit reduces the volume in “OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE” in the set menu. • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOL +/–, etc. • During muting, the MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. ■ Night listening mode This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low volumes or at night. Press NIGHT on the remote control. Press NIGHT once more to return to normal reproduction. NIGHT 11 +10 Note • Setting the unit in standby mode cancels night listening mode. y • You can use night listening mode with any of the sound field programs. • The NIGHT indicator on the front panel display lights when the unit is in night listening mode. • Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 12 ■ When you have finished using this unit Front panel Remote control Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or Front panel 24 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 24 03.1.10, 6:31 PM Remote control PLAYBACK ■ Notes on digital signals Input modes and indications This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you wish to use. Each time you turn on the unit power, the input mode is set to the “INPUT 2 INPUT MODE” setting defined in the set menu. Press INPUT MODE repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs INPUT MODE Front panel VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected, even if the unit is receiving another signal simultaneously. ANALOG: In this mode, only analog input signals are selected, even the unit is receiving digital signals at the same time. Notes • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, the unit may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if there is a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, the unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack on this unit and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, the unit does not output any sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – The unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after detecting the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, the unit can only reproduce DTS source. If you want to play a normal PCM source immediately, change the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this state continues for longer than 30 seconds, the unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION SP A The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96 kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz: • You cannot use any DSP programs. • The unit will output sound as 2-channel stereo from the main left and right speakers only. Therefore, you cannot adjust the level of the effect speakers while listening to such a source. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If it detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, there is a delay in sound output for a moment when playback resumes after a search, because the unit must select the digital signal again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the unit may not output any sound for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. English 25 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 25 03.1.10, 6:31 PM PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 29 – 31. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to cycle through sub-programs if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 2 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Adventure” and “General”. STANDBY /ON BASS SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 9 B EFFECT JAZZ CLUB 1 /DTS SUR. TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT HALL 10 0 S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 OPTICAL VCR2/DVR PROGRAM l / h VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R POWER POWER TV AV General AMP TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A L C R LFE RL RR 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Notes VOL MUTE SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • You cannot use the digital sound field processor with a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit or when the unit is reproducing a digital source with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in standby mode, it stores the current source and DSP program in memory and automatically selects them when you turn on the power again. • If the unit receives a Dolby Digital or DTS signal when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When the unit is reproducing a monaural source with PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie, no sound is output from the main and rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the set menu is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 2,3 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 12 CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. 2 Press one of the numeric buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 y VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A Adventure L C R LFE RL • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. RR 26 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 26 03.1.10, 6:31 PM PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or Neo:6 You can listen to 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or Neo:6 in program No. 9. The display cycles as follows each time you press q/ DTS SUR : PRO LOGIC→PRO LOGIC Enhanced→PRO LOGIC II Movie→PRO LOGIC II Music→Neo:6 Cinema→Neo:6 Music→PRO LOGIC→.... y • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Enhanced, PRO LOGIC II Movie, PRO LOGIC II Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and Neo:6 Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. STANDBY /ON BASS ■ Playing Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES material TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Press 6.1/5.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder to listen to Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES material with a rear center speaker. PROGRAM l / h 6.1/5.1 12 POWER POWER TV AV AMP 2 REC CHP/INDEX AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL (Example) TITLE TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET ES MENU MATRIX A/B/C/D/E CH TV VOL ON SCREEN VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER STEREO CD PHONO VOLUME SP A Matrix 6.1 PRESET TEST RETURN VCR2/DVR L C R LFE RL RR DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 3 9 10 0 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 AMP ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 12 CHP/INDEX Press 6.1/5.1 to choose the playback mode. (The modes you can select vary depending on the format of the material you are playing.) AUTO: This mode automatically switches to Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that the unit detects. The rear center speaker does not output sound for 5.1 channel sources. Discrete 6.1: This mode can only be selected only when the unit detects a source encoded with the DTS ES Discrete format. (The DISCRETE indicator lights up.) Matrix 6.1: This mode allows for 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 EX or MATRIX decoder. (Either indicator lights up.) OFF: The rear center speaker does not output sound in this mode. BASIC OPERATION MUTE SET MENU LEVEL TV INPUT Notes VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD PHONO VOLUME SP A PL TUNER PRO LOGIC L R 27 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 27 03.1.10, 6:31 PM English • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) that this unit can automatically detect. Select “Matrix 6.1” to play these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel sound. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press 6.1/5.1 in the following cases: 1 When “1C REAR LR” is set to NON. 2 When effects are turned off. 3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is being played. 4 When the unit is reproducing a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source. 5 When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The input mode resets to AUTO when you turn the unit power off. PLAYBACK ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the set menu to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, or DTS program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker. • If you turn off the sound effects while the unit is reproducing sound from a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the unit will output mix the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels and output them from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range” on the set menu to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. y • During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. 2 Press d to display the information about the input signal. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expect from actual speakers through headphones, with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, the unit reproduces the source in normal stereo.) + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET Notes CH + PRESET TV VOL – • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or the unit is receiving a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. • The sound from the LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphones. ■ Normal stereo reproduction Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control (Format): The display shows the signal format. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. in: The display shows the number of input signal source channels, as follows: For multi-channel soundtrack such as front 3 channels, rear 2 channels and LFE, the display shows “3/2/ LFE”. For bilingual broadcasts where the signal is split into 2 channels, the display shows “1+1”. For signals with more than 3 channels the display shows “MLT”. fs: The display shows the sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” shows in the front panel display. rate: The display shows the bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” shows in the front panel display. flg: The display shows the flag - data encoded in a DTS or Dolby Digital signal that causes this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate decoder for playback. 28 0105RX-V740_23-28_EN-U.p65 28 03.1.10, 6:31 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Understanding sound fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. ■ Recreating a sound field Hi-Fi DSP programs BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. No. Program Features 1 CONCERT HALL A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. English 29 0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 29 03.1.10, 6:32 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic II decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder for adding a rear center channel. You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. CINEMA-DSP Programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Program Features 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 5 MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 6 TV THEATER/ Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. TV THEATER/Variety/ Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. 30 0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 30 03.1.10, 6:32 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ For movie programs No. 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 Features Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Straight Decode The built-in decoder reproduces source sounds and sound-effects precisely. No DSP effect is applied in this program. Enhanced Mode This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 9 Program Straight Decode This unit is equipped with various precise decoders; • Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound • Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel • Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources Select any of the Straight Decode modes in Program 9 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced”) to use any of these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and the DSP indicator turns off. Note • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the main and rear speakers output effect sounds. English 31 0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 31 03.1.10, 6:32 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound field effects The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Presence DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES + DSP sound field effect These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel. ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Presence DSP sound field Most movie material has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 This unit comes with Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6 decoders which decode 2-channel Dolby Surround data into five or six full range channels. Both decoders have two modes, MOVIE/CINEMA for movies, and MUSIC for 2channel sources. 32 0106RX-V740_29-32_EN-U.p65 32 03.1.10, 6:32 PM TUNING There are 2 methods of tuning; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 4 ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING 1 3 3 2 SET MENU VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM VCR2/DVR INPUT MODE VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A VIDEO AUX SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU A B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R TUNED AUTO TREBLE BASS OPTICAL AM 1530 kHz When the unit is tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the station received is shown on the front panel display. 4 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD or Front panel C ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you are trying to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) until the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display. PHONO A BASIC OPERATION 1 TUNER 6CH INPUT SILENT Remote control TUNING MODE AUTO 2 AUTO/MANUAL MONO Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. Disappears If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE 3 Lights up If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR2/DVR VCR1 SP A EDIT VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A EDIT A TUNER TUNED AM 1440 kHz AUTO AUTO/MANUAL MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PRESET/TUNING SET MENU TUNER TUNED A Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. AUTO AM 1440 kHz Note • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. English 33 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 33 03.1.10, 6:33 PM TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset number. 2 13 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT BASS SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT 1 TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) until the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure described in “Manually presetting stations”. Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. AUTO AUTO/MANUAL MONO Lights up 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for at least 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning starts, beginning at the frequency currently displayed and moving toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN`L/AUTO FM VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM 89.9 MHz When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 34 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 34 03.1.10, 6:33 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. 4 2,5 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING VOLUME INPUT SET MENU PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT VCR2/DVR S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER OPTICAL SP A TUNED MEMORY C3:AM 1440 kHz 3 4 1 Preset number 5 Tune in to a station. See page 33 for tuning instructions. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R A TUNER TUNED AM 1440 kHz MEMORY When tuned to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 MAN`L/AUTO FM Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL SP A DVD MD/CD-R BASIC OPERATION SP A Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. TUNER TUNED C3:AM 1440 kHz MEMORY MEMORY MAN`L/AUTO FM Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) is showing on the front panel display. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E NEXT VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD SP A MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED MEMORY C :AM 1440 kHz Preset group English 35 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 35 03.1.10, 6:33 PM TUNING ■ Exchanging preset stations Selecting a preset station You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. 2,4 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT VOLUME TUNING MODE MEMORY INPUT AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM PRESET/TUNING FM/AM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY TREBLE BASS VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E B INPUT MODE SET MENU NEXT EFFECT 6CH INPUT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 2 SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST RETURN PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN 1,3 1,3 MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E STEREO DISPLAY 1 2 EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 1 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX Select preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for at least 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. 12 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. VCR2/DVR PRESET/TUNING SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER TUNED MEMORY E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT MENU A/B/C/D/E NEXT Front panel 2 1 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 Remote control 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band and frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. Select preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER TUNED MEMORY A5:FM 90.6 MHz + TV VOL 4 PRESET/TUNING or CH TV MUTE SELECT – SET MENU PRESET CH + PRESET Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. TV VOL – Front panel VCR2/DVR Remote control PRESET/TUNING EDIT VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL SP A DVD MD/CD-R TUNER VCR1 EDIT TUNED 36 36 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER MEMORY E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. C3:AM 1440 kHz 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 V-AUX SP A 03.1.10, 6:33 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. SLEEP y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. CODE SET 2 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD BASIC OPERATION SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR2/DVR VCR1 SP A V-AUX D-TV/CBL MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP HiFi DSP SLEEP 3 DVD SLEEP 120min VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR2/DVR VCR1 SP A V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP HiFi DSP ROCK CONCERT PHONO VOLUME L R English 37 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 37 03.1.10, 6:33 PM RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed on other recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components for details on their operation . 2 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT TREBLE BASS VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU B EFFECT S VIDEO PHONES TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL CODE SET SYSTEM POWER 2 STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT PHONO A B C V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER TV AV • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to it. • DSP programs and volume, bass, and treble settings do not affect the recorded material. • You cannot record from a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit. • Input sources are not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output to VCR 1 OUT.) • This unit’s DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT(REC) jacks are independent. To record a source using a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, connect the source component to one of the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. • Check the copyright laws in your country if you wish to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. SELECT POWER Notes AMP ■ Special considerations when recording DTS material 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. INPUT or Front panel A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, follow the operating instructions of your player to set it to output an analog signal, if it is compatible with the DTS format. Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 38 0107RX-V740_33-38_EN-U.P65 38 03.1.10, 6:33 PM SET MENU You can set the following parameters on the set menu to obtain a better sound from the unit. Change the settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Set menu list Adjusting the items on the set menu Use the remote control to make adjustments. The set menus are divided by use and function into the 4 categories listed here. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC 1 AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL ■ BASIC The BASIC area contains the basic parameters that you must set before using this unit. It consists of the following menus. See pages 20 – 22 for a detailed explanation. SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST 1 SETUP RETURN MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT 2 SP LEVEL (Speaker level) HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 ■ SOUND 6 10 0 The SOUND area contains parameters for altering sound output. It consists of the following menus that you can use to alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system. 1 SPEAKER SET 2 SP DISTANCE (Speaker distance) 3 LFE LEVEL (Low frequency effect level) 4 D. RANGE (Dynamic range) 4 4,6,7 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 12 y • You can change set menu parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. • You can use NEXT and SET MENU +/– on the front panel to change these settings, if the unit is not set to TUNER mode. Press NEXT to select the category or field you wish to change, and SET MENU +/– to change the parameters. Note • You cannot change some set menu parameters while the unit is in night listening mode. 6 HP TONE CTRL (Headphone tone control) 1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the set menu. ■ INPUT The INPUT area contains parameters concerned with signal input. It consists of the following menus that you can use to change the assignment of input jacks, and rename components. 1 I/O ASSIGN AMP ADVANCED OPERATION 5 CENTER GEQ (Center graphic equalizer) ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 9 2 3,5,8 SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 2 INPUT MODE 3 INPUT RENAME ■ OPTION This is a supplementary set up menu provided for your convenience. It consists of the following menus that you can use to change display brightness, protect existing settings, and perform other non-essential functions. 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the desired menu. 4 5 Press j / i to enter the selected menu. Press u / d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. 1 DISPLAY SET + TV VOL 2 MEM. GUARD CH – 3 AUDIO MUTE TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 4 ZONE SET CH + PRESET TV VOL – • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 39 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 39 03.1.10, 6:35 PM English 5 REC OUT (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) SET MENU 6 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. + TV VOL CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET PRESET Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. TV VOL – Depending on the menu item, press u/d to select a sub item. Note + TV VOL CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) – Press j / i repeatedly to change the menu item setting. • Some menu item settings have no effect when the unit is reproducing a source with a digital signal sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. PRESET TV VOL 7 SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) If you add a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. + TV VOL CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET PRESET Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) TV VOL – 8 Press u / d repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the set menu. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET HALL CH + or JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. PRESET 9 TV VOL 10 0 – ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. 12 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If this happens, adjust the items again. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the main left and right speakers. The BASIC and SOUND menus The “BASIC” menu allows you to easily set the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” and “SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE” parameters. It is not necessary to reset any of the parameters in the “BASIC” menu, but you can access more detailed parameters in the “SOUND” menu if you wish. Note • After altering parameters in the “SOUND” menu, if you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” and then select “SET”, the parameters from the “SOUND” menu alter in response to any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. Do not enter the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu unless you wish to change these settings. If you accidentally enter the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu, select CANCEL to return to the “BASIC” menu. (page 21) 40 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 40 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the main left and right channel signals to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. ■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker mode) If you add a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back transitions. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the rear center channel signal to the rear center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. The unit directs all of the rear center channel signal to the rear left and right speakers. ■ 1E BASS (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center speaker will automatically be set to NON and the “1D REAR CT” item will be skipped. SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The unit directs the LFE signals to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The unit directs LFE signals to the main speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION y BOTH The unit directs LFE signals to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and the subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. English 41 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 41 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SET MENU SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) Use this feature to adjust the delay applied to center and rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speakers with a source such as Dolby Digital or DTS. Ideally, the center speaker and the rear speakers should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker and the rear speakers, you can adjust the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear speakers to the main listening position to make it seem the same as the distance between the listening position and main left and right speakers. 1 2 Press u / d to select “UNIT”. 3 Press u / d to select the speaker for which you want to adjust the delay. 4 Press j / i to set the delay. Press i for higher values and j for lower values. Press j / i to select the unit “meters” or “feet” to be used in setting. C Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 Press u / d to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) C L SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL R MAX Select MAX for feature films. STD Select STD for general use. RC RL RR RR RL MIN Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. RC ■ Setting by “meters” Control range: Initial settings: 0.3 to 24.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 2.10 m (for rear center) ■ Setting by “feet” Control range: Initial settings: 1 to 80 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 7.0 ft (for rear center) Note • No delay will be set if you set the same distance for the main L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center. 42 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 42 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SET MENU SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band 1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u to select a lower frequency. 2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that frequency. INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/ output assignment) You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from those of the component. This lets you to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once assigned, select that component with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 1A for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks Choices: Note • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this parameter by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST. SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ■ 1B for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 1C for OPTICAL INPUT jacks Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 1D for COAXIAL INPUT jack Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you are using headphones. Control range (dB): BASS .................... –6 to +3 TRBL (treble) ....... –6 to +3 Initial setting: BASS .................... 0 dB TRBL .................... 0 dB [A] DVD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. English 43 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 43 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SET MENU INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn this unit on (see page 25 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET ■ DIMMER Use this to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. AUTO Select this setting to allow the unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. Control range: –4 to 0 LAST Select this setting to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective sources. Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 INPUT 3 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input name you want to change. ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting adjusts the vertical position of the OSD. Press + to lower the position of the OSD. Press – to raise the position of the OSD. ■ GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting to display a gray background when there is no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen, including the on-screen display if you select OFF. Choices: AUTO, OFF 3 INPUT RENAME DVD -> Note DVD • If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information is displayed on the screen when the unit is not receiving a video signal. -/+ : Position / : Character 2 Press AMP and then use j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. 3 INPUT RENAME DVD -> (With the exception of China and General models) Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite signals to S-video signals to output through the S-video jack when the unit is receiving a video signal that is not in the S-video format. Choices: ON, OFF DVD -/+ : Position / : Character 3 ■ V CONV. (Video conversion) Press u / d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. ON Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video signals. OFF Select OFF to stop the conversion of composite signals to S-video signals. 3 INPUT RENAME DVD -> DVD1 -/+ : Position / : Character 44 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 44 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SET MENU OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on the unit. OPTION 4 ZONE SET ■ SP B (speaker B set) Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B Choices: ON, OFF Select ON to protect the following features: • The on-screen display (OSD) mode • All set menu items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other set menu items. OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE Adjusts the amount by which the MUTE function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –50dB, –20dB MUTE Completely halts all output of sound. –20dB Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 20dB. ZONE B Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. OPTION 5 REC OUT (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) REC OUT jack settings. ADVANCED OPERATION –50dB Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 50dB. MAIN Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. Choices: SOURCE, ZONE 2 SOURCE This setting outputs the source selected with the input selector from the REC OUT jack. ZONE 2 This setting outputs the source selected with the ZONE 2 selector from the REC OUT jack. Select this if you want to use Zone 2 features. English 45 0108RX-V740_39-45_EN-U.p65 45 03.1.10, 6:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, set up the remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR CODE SET SYSTEM Å/ı/Ç buttons and input selector buttons POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT Press AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST RETURN MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E CH PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. Å/ı/Ç buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı/Ç buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å...LD player ı...CD recorder Ç...TV SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. The display window will show one of the following: A, B, C, PHONO, V-AUX, TUNER, MD/CDR, CD, TV/ CBL, VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. 10 0 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX CLEAR CODE SET SLEEP 6CH INPUT A B C PHONO TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV REC POWER POWER AUDIO TV AMP AV DISC SKIP REC VOL AUDIO DISC SKIP SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT TV VOL PRESET RETURN TV MUTE TITLE SELECT TV INPUT TV VOL CH SET MENU 1 MUSIC VIDEO 5 /DTS SUR. 9 CH TV VOL PRESET ON SCREEN TV MUTE DISPLAY MENU A/B/C/D/E STEREO CH SELECT 12 HALL MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E LEVEL 8 NIGHT RE-NAME STANDBY V-AUX CH MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER TEST /DTS SUR. 9 ROCK CONCERT The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOL +/–, MUTE and STEREO) function in any mode. ■ Controlling other component PRESET JAZZ CLUB TEST 2 RETURN ROCK CONCERT 3TV VOL EFFECT PRESET ENTERTAINMENT ON SCREEN 4 DISPLAY TV THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ROCK JAZZ 6HALL 7 CLUB CONCERT 8 1 MUSIC VIDEO 10 0 5 2 +106 /DTS SUR. 9 3 ENTERTAINMENT 4 6.1/5.1 NIGHT TV MOVIE MOVIE THEATER THEATER 1 THEATER 2 11 12 10 0 7 CHP/INDEX 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 12 CHP/INDEX Component control area You can control up to 12 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 50). 46 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 46 03.1.10, 6:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the manufacturer code You can control other components with the remote control by setting the appropriate manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 12 component controls. 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. The following table shows factory-set component controls (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each. + TV VOL CH Component control (buttons) 1 Component category (Library) Manufacturer – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – A LD Yamaha-2 B CD-R Yamaha C TV – PHONO VCR – V-AUX VCR – TUNER TUNER Yamaha-1 MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1 CD CD Yamaha-1 D-TV/CBL TV – VCR1 VCR – VCR2/DVR VCR – DVD DVD Yamaha-3 A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD *L:AMP “Amplifier library” has two modes, as follows: YPC: Select this if you do not want to use any Zone 2 features. Zone 2: Select this if you want to use Zone 2 features. • Zone 2 is only available in models for the U.S.A., Canada and Australia. • The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”. • You cannot assign “Amplifier library” to any of the input selector buttons or Å/ı/Ç. ADVANCED OPERATION Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to select the component you want to set up. If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE, TUNER, AMP*, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR Notes 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Check to see if the selected code works in step 4. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process cancels. If this happens, start again from step 2. CODE SET English 47 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 47 03.1.10, 6:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV 3 AMP Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and / (slash). (Pressing u changes characters in the reverse order.) REC + AUDIO TV VOL DISC SKIP VOL CH – SET MENU LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – MENU A/B/C/D/E y • If you want to continue setting up codes for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed. Press CODE SET again to exit from the setup mode. + TV VOL CODE SET CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET Note – Changing the source name in the display window y • If you want to continue setting up codes for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME You can change the source name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector buttons to control different components. 2 + TV VOL • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press any buttons other than those indicated in each step, or when you press more than one button at once. 1 CH PRESET Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to select the source component to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME 48 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 48 03.1.10, 6:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing renamed source names, and setup manufacturer codes 1 4 Press an input selector button or Å/ı/Ç to select the component control for which you want to clear the name, function or manufacturer code. A B C PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD CLEAR Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. If this happens, start again from step 2. 5 2 Press CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. CLEAR CLEAR Note Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process cancels. If this happens, start again from step 1. 3 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press any buttons other than those indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. Press u / d to select the clear mode. The mode cycles in the display window in the following order: ADVANCED OPERATION + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – (L: component name) Clears setup manufacturer code for the component control. Clears all renamed source names in the display window. Clears all setup manufacturer codes and renamed source names. This returns the unit to the default factory settings. English 49 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 49 03.1.10, 6:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components if you have set the manufacturer code for your component in the remote control. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate the component correctly. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. You can also select a component to operate other than the one selected as the input source by pressing SELECT k/n. The display window shows the currently selected component that you can operate. SELECT POWER POWER TV AV 1 AMP 9 0 REC 2 AUDIO DISC SKIP 3 VOL 4 q LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 5 TV VOL TV INPUT 6 CH 7 w A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET MUTE e PRESET TEST TV VOL RETURN ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL 8 JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 10 0 DVD player 1 TV POWER 2 REC/DISC SKIP 3w y t d a 4e 5 TITLE/TV INPUT 6 TV VOL +/u TV VOL –/d CH +/i CH –/j TV MUTE/SELECT 7 RETURN 8 1-11 9 AV POWER 0 AUDIO qr w MENU/A/B/C/D/E e DISPLAY r 12/CHP/INDEX TV power *2 VCR TV, digital/cable TV TV power TV power *2 Disc skip Rec Play Play LD player VCR rec Pause Stop Stop Search backward Search backward Title Skip forward Pause Stop Stop Stop VCR search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel down *2 *2 Select Skip forward VCR stop VCR channel up VCR channel down Play Skip forward TV mute TV mute Numeric buttons Numeric buttons TV input TV input *2 *2 TV volume down *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel down *2 TV mute *2 *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume down *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel down *2 TV mute *2 TV power TV input *2 TV volume up Tuner *2 Rec (MD) Skip backward *2 Left TV power *2 Pause TV input *2 CD/MD recorder Play *3 r 12 Skip backward TV volume up Right CHP/INDEX Pause TV input Down 11 +10 Skip backward *2 *2 8 6.1/5.1 VCR pause TV volume up Up 7 NIGHT Play *3 *3 4 Disc skip VCR play Skip backward 3 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 *2 *3 *3 ENTERTAINMENT TV power *2 Skip forward Pause CD player TV power ROCK CONCERT TV volume up TV volume down TV channel up Preset up TV channel down Preset down TV mute *2 Return Numeric buttons *1 Power Power *1 *3 VCR power Audio Numeric buttons Power *1 Numeric buttons Power *1 Numeric buttons Power *1 Preset stations (1-8) Power *1 Sound Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Display Display Display Chapter/Time Index Index Menu A/B/C/D/E Display Title/Index Enter Enter *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or Ç. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and Ç areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. 50 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 50 03.1.10, 6:35 PM SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS Adjusting the volume during playback You can adjust the volume of the speakers while listening to sound playback. POWER POWER TV AV AMP Using the test tone Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. 1 POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP REC VOL AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL SET MENU LEVEL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU TV INPUT CH TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT TV INPUT CH PRESET ON SCREEN TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 3 CH TEST TV VOL TITLE 2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET RETURN MUTE TEST 2,5 STEREO DISPLAY RETURN MUTE MENU CH PRESET TV VOL 4 A/B/C/D/E ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY 3 EFFECT ROCK ENTER- EFFECT ROCK ENTER- Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. Check that “AMP” is showing on the remote control display. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. The unit cycles through the speakers in the following order each time you press LEVEL: MAIN L→CENTER→MAIN R→R SUR. (rear R)→REAR CT (rear center)→L SUR. (rear L)→SWFR (subwoofer)→..... 1 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. Check that “AMP” is showing on the remote control display. 2 Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a speaker to adjust. Each time you press d, the unit will cycle through the speakers in the following order: TEST LEFT(main L)→TEST CENTER(center)→TEST RIGHT(main R)→TEST R SUR.(rear R)→TEST REAR CNTR(rear center)→TEST L SUR.(rear L)→TEST SUBWOOFER(subwoofer)→..... (Press u to cycle the speakers in the reverse order.) 4 5 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. y • Pressing LEVEL once opens the level display. Press u / d at this time to select a speaker. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volume. • The center and rear speakers can be adjusted by a maximum of –10dB ~ +10dB. • The main speakers and subwoofer can be adjusted by a maximum of –20dB ~ 0dB. Notes • You cannot adjust speaker levels if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” parameter in the set menu is set to NON. • You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS” parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is set to MAIN. • If you use LEVEL to adjust speaker levels, the speaker levels you previously set with the test tone will also change. • If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone halts. Notes • You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. • You cannot adjust speaker volumes if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” parameter on the set menu is set to NON. • You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS” parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is set to MAIN. • If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. y 51 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 51 03.1.10, 6:35 PM English • Depending on the source the unit is reproducing, the speaker levels set with the test tone may not be to your liking. If this is the case, adjust the speaker levels while listening to the source. ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) You can make up a multi-room audio system with this unit. Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit. To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment: • An amplifier and speakers for the second room • An infrared signal receiver in the second room • An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (for example, to a CD player or DVD player). y • Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected. Note • Using the unit in Zone 2 mode affects the signal that the unit outputs from the VCR 2/DVR OUT jacks. Do not use these jacks if you wish to use Zone 2 functionality. Example of a system configuration and connections Main room Second room ZONE 2 OUT Amplifier CD player (or other component) This unit Infrared signal receiver CD INPUT Remote control REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared emitter REMOTE CONTROL OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN ■ To enable Zone 2 mode Set “OPTION 5 REC OUT” to ZONE 2 on the set menu. • The ZONE 2 indicator on the front panel display appears when Zone 2 power is on, even if the main unit is in standby mode. ■ Special considerations for playing DTS encoded materials When playing DTS encoded materials, the analog output jacks of the source component may output excessive noise that could damage your speakers. Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals will be sent to the second room. Set your player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. For CDs encoded with DTS DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise. 52 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 52 03.1.10, 6:35 PM ZONE 2 (FOR U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS) Remote Control in Zone 2 4 You can control the component by using the component control area buttons. You can use the supplied remote control in a second room (Zone 2), as the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening conditions in the main room. REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL SET MENU LEVEL TITLE ■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote control TV VOL TV INPUT CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. TV VOL RETURN + CH EFFECT JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. ENTERTAINMENT 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 12 CHP/INDEX Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. CH + Notes PRESET TV VOL – 3 10 0 5 TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET STEREO DISPLAY HALL Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. TV VOL ON SCREEN ROCK CONCERT 9 2 CH PRESET TEST 1 MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E Press u / d to select “ZONE2”. + • The MUTE button on the remote control works for the second room. However Zone 2 volume cannot be adjusted with the remote control. Use the control on the amplifier in the second room. • CODE SET, CLEAR and RENAME will not function when the remote control is set to ZONE 2 mode. TV VOL CH ■ When you have finished using the unit CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET + PRESET – 4 Press CODE SET to complete the Zone 2 setup. Immediately after you have configured the remote control for Zone 2, the remote will be to MAIN mode. When the remote is in MAIN mode, you can turn the main unit on, or set it in standby mode independently of the Zone 2 by pressing SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY (“MAIN” appears on the display window for 2 seconds.) 1 Press SELECT n to display “SYSTM” in the display window. 2 Press STANDBY. y • The SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY works differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. ■ To use the remote control in Zone 2 1 Press SELECT k to display “ZONE2” in the display window. 2 3 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power on. LCD Display “AMP” or name of component (ex. DVD) turn the main unit on/standby ZONE2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component (ex. 2:DVD)” turn the Zone2 on/ standby “SYSTM” turn both the main unit and Zone2 on/ standby B C V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Notes • To change the remote control to MAIN mode, press SELECT k / n repeatedly if necessary to display a name of a component on the display window. • When the remote control is in SYSTEM mode, pressing any button other than SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY returns the remote to the previous mode. Note • You cannot select VCR 2/DVR as the input source. 53 0109RX-V740_46-53_EN-U.p65 53 03.1.10, 6:35 PM English A SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY MAIN mode SYSTEM mode Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. ADVANCED OPERATION To set both the main unit and the Zone 2 in standby mode TV VOL SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a sound field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. Sound field program parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters. However, this unit also allows you to create your own sound field by starting with one of the built-in program and adjusting its parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to create the precise effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. 54 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 54 03.1.10, 6:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing parameter settings 4 Press u / d to select the parameter. You can enjoy high quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. Use the remote control to make adjustments. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 5 y Press j / i to change the parameter value. • It is advisable to use on-screen display when changing the settings. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL POWER POWER TV AV AMP – 1 REC AUDIO y DISC SKIP VOL TITLE TV INPUT CH TV VOL MENU A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST RETURN 4 2 3 PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 /DTS SUR. 9 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX 10 0 6 Press AMP to set the remote control in AMP mode. 2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. AMP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select a DSP program you want to adjust. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 0 Program No. 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 11 +10 CHP/INDEX • For some of the programs, the available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page. To scroll through pages, press u / d. • You cannot change parameter values when “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” on the set menu is set to ON. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION /DTS SUR. Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes 12 1 3 • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. To reset to the factory-set value, press j / i repeatedly until the asterisk mark disappears. 5 MUTE SET MENU LEVEL 12 Program name P03 ROCK CONCERT ≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB INIT.DLY…………15ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………5 REV.TIME…………1.6s REV.DELAY……120ms Cursor Parameters Parameter values The parameter setting display English 55 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 55 03.1.10, 6:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY (Initial delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. Control Range: 1 to 99 msec Level Level Level Sound source Early reflections INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY Time Time INIT.DLY Sound source Reflection face 1 ms 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Sound source Time Time Sound source 0.1 2.0 56 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 56 03.1.10, 6:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Sound source Live Level Level Level Dead Time Time Time Sound source Small reflected sound 0 Large reflected sound 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when the unit is using at least two front and two rear channels. Control range: 1 to 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 to 10 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear center initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. Control range: 1 to 49 msec ■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear center room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 ■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear center liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. Control range: 0 to 10 English 57 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 57 03.1.10, 6:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 sec Reverberation Sound source Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV. TIME 60 dB REV. TIME Short reverberation Sound source Reverberation REV. TIME Long reverberation 1.0 s 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound give the impression of being in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 msec Level Function: Sound source (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. DELAY REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Level Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Sound source REV. LEVEL Time 58 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 58 03.1.10, 6:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING For 6ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ RL LEVEL (Rear left level) ■ RR LEVEL (Rear right level) ■ RC LEVEL (Rear center level) For PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control Range: 0 – 0.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 59 0110RX-V740_54-59_EN-U.p65 59 03.1.10, 6:36 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound. The picture does not appear. Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. – The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in standby mode. 16 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection is not touching anything other than its respective connection. 16 – 17 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. – The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 19 The GRAY BACK setting under “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 44 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. No appropriate input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 23 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to cancel mute and adjust the volume. – Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g; a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. – The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Connect components using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 10 – 11 60 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 Refer to page 60 03.1.10, 6:37 PM 10 – 17 23 16 – 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Remedy Refer to page Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 16 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. – The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. – The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. – Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 – 17 No sound from the effect speakers. The sound effect is switched off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. The sound suddenly goes off. Cause The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. A digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 51 “SOUND 1A CENTER” on the set menu is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 40 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. – The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 41 “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 41 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 26 – 31 51 26 – 31 – Select MAIN. 41 The speaker mode settings (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the set menu does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 40 – 41 English “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. 61 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 61 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer. 26 – 31 – The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. – 03.1.10, 6:37 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause No sound from the rear center speaker. Remedy Refer to page “SOUND 1C REAR LR” or “SOUND 1D REAR CT” on the set menu is set to NON. Select LRG or SML. 41 The Dolby Digital EX or the DTS-ES decoder is not switched on. Press 6.1/5.1 on the remote control to switch the decoder on. – Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. – No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. – The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. – The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. – The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. There is no source component connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on the unit cannot be changed. “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu is set to ON. Set “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu to OFF. – The unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. – “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. The speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. – There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. – The unit suddenly turns into standby mode. The internal temperature has become too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until the unit cools down and then turn it back on. – A “humming” sound can be heard. – 62 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 62 03.1.10, 6:37 PM 10 – 12 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 13 Use the manual tuning method. 33 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. – The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. – Use the manual tuning method. 33 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 34 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. – Use the manual tuning method. 33 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 13 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. – ■ Remote control The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. – The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 47 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 47 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. English – 63 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 63 03.1.10, 6:37 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Problem GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by a specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range of channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. 64 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 64 03.1.10, 6:37 PM GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP ■ S-video signal ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 65 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 65 03.1.10, 6:37 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 90 W 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 110 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 140 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • IEC Power [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 105 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 130 W • Usable sensitivity (IHF, Mono) ............................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 130/160/190/235 W [Other models] ................................................ 120/145/185/230 W • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 100 or more • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to OUT (REC) (5 mV, shorted) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models] ....... 86 dB [Other models] ................................................................... 81 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz AM SECTION • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 320 W/420 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 320 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.9 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Dimension (W x H x D) ..................... 435 x 171 x 390 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”) • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Weight ............................................................ 13.0 kg (28 lbs 11 oz) • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT MAIN/CENTER/REAR CENTER/ REAR (SURROUND) ............................................ 2.4 V/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2 [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] .. 150 mV/1.5 kΩ *Specifications are subject to change without notice. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 30 MHz, –3 dB 66 0111RX-V740_60-66_EN-U.p65 66 03.1.10, 6:37 PM YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100RX-V740-cv4_EN-U.p65 1 03.1.10, 6:15 PM Printed in Malaysia WA69310